-
1 חרדת ניתוק
fear of separation -
2 angoisse
angoisse [ɑ̃gwas]feminine nouna. anguish* * *ɑ̃gwas1) gén, Psychologie anxiety (devant, de about)2) ( crise d'anxiété) anxiety3) Philosophie anguish, angst* * *ɑ̃ɡwas nfanguish no pl* * *angoisse nf1 gén, Psych anxiety (devant, de about); vivre dans l'angoisse permanente to live in a state of perpetual anxiety; ce boulot c'est l'angoisse○! this work is torture!; je suis arrivée tôt dans l'angoisse de rater mon avion I arrived early for fear of missing my plane;2 ( crise d'anxiété) anxiety; tous les soirs elle a des angoisses she suffers from anxiety every night;3 Philos anguish, angst.[ɑ̃gwas] nom féminin[inquiétude] anxiety[tourment] anguishêtre ou vivre dans l'angoisse to live in (a constant state of) anxietyvivre dans l'angoisse de quelque chose to live in dread of ou to dread something————————angoisses nom féminin pluriel -
3 angoissé
angoisse [ɑ̃gwas]feminine nouna. anguish* * *ɑ̃gwas1) gén, Psychologie anxiety (devant, de about)2) ( crise d'anxiété) anxiety3) Philosophie anguish, angst* * *ɑ̃ɡwas nfanguish no pl* * *angoisse nf1 gén, Psych anxiety (devant, de about); vivre dans l'angoisse permanente to live in a state of perpetual anxiety; ce boulot c'est l'angoisse○! this work is torture!; je suis arrivée tôt dans l'angoisse de rater mon avion I arrived early for fear of missing my plane;2 ( crise d'anxiété) anxiety; tous les soirs elle a des angoisses she suffers from anxiety every night;3 Philos anguish, angst.[personne] anxious————————, angoissée [ɑ̃gwase] nom masculin, nom fémininc'est un grand angoissé he's the anxious type ou a terrible worrier -
4 F93.0
рус Тревожное расстройство у детей, вызванное разлукойeng Separation anxiety disorder of childhood. Should be diagnosed when fear of separation constitutes the focus of the anxiety and when such anxiety first arose during the early years of childhood. It is differentiated from normal separation anxiety when it is of a degree (severity) that is statistically unusual (including an abnormal persistence beyond the usual age period), and when it is associated with significant problems in social functioning. (Excludes: ) mood (affective) disorders ( F30-F39), neurotic disorders ( F40-F48). phobic anxiety disorder of childhood ( F93.l), social anxiety disorder of childhood ( F93.2) -
5 ἀπό
ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away fromⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.3-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.③ to indicate origin or source, fromⓐ lit., with verbs of motionα. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcomeⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer6-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, ofα. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.2 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M. -
6 ab
ăb, ā, abs, prep. with abl. This IndoEuropean particle (Sanscr. apa or ava, Etr. av, Gr. upo, Goth. af, Old Germ. aba, New Germ. ab, Engl. of, off) has in Latin the following forms: ap, af, ab (av), au-, a, a; aps, abs, as-. The existence of the oldest form, ap, is proved by the oldest and best MSS. analogous to the prep. apud, the Sanscr. api, and Gr. epi, and by the weakened form af, which, by the rule of historical grammar and the nature of the Latin letter f, can be derived only from ap, not from ab. The form af, weakened from ap, also very soon became obsolete. There are but five examples of it in inscriptions, at the end of the sixth and in the course of the seventh century B. C., viz.:I.AF VOBEIS,
Inscr. Orell. 3114;AF MVRO,
ib. 6601;AF CAPVA,
ib. 3308;AF SOLO,
ib. 589;AF LYCO,
ib. 3036 ( afuolunt =avolant, Paul. ex Fest. p. 26 Mull., is only a conjecture). In the time of Cicero this form was regarded as archaic, and only here and there used in account-books; v. Cic. Or. 47, 158 (where the correct reading is af, not abs or ab), and cf. Ritschl, Monum. Epigr. p. 7 sq.—The second form of this preposition, changed from ap, was ab, which has become the principal form and the one most generally used through all periods—and indeed the only oue used before all vowels and h; here and there also before some consonants, particularly l, n, r, and s; rarely before c, j, d, t; and almost never before the labials p, b, f, v, or before m, such examples as ab Massiliensibus, Caes. B. C. 1, 35, being of the most rare occurrence.—By changing the b of ab through v into u, the form au originated, which was in use only in the two compounds aufero and aufugio for abfero, ab-fugio; aufuisse for afuisse, in Cod. Medic. of Tac. A. 12, 17, is altogether unusual. Finally, by dropping the b of ab, and lengthening the a, ab was changed into a, which form, together with ab, predominated through all periods of the Latin language, and took its place before all consonants in the later years of Cicero, and after him almoet exclusively.—By dropping the b without lengthening the a, ab occurs in the form a- in the two compounds a-bio and a-perio, q. v.—On the other hand, instead of reducing ap to a and a, a strengthened collateral form, aps, was made by adding to ap the letter s (also used in particles, as in ex, mox, vix). From the first, aps was used only before the letters c, q, t, and was very soon changed into abs (as ap into ab):abs chorago,
Plaut. Pers. 1, 3, 79 (159 Ritschl):abs quivis,
Ter. Ad. 2, 3, 1:abs terra,
Cato, R. R. 51;and in compounds: aps-cessero,
Plaut. Trin. 3, 1, 24 (625 R.); id. ib. 3, 2, 84 (710 R): abs-condo, abs-que, abs-tineo, etc. The use of abs was confined almost exclusively to the combination abs te during the whole ante-classic period, and with Cicero till about the year 700 A. U. C. (=B. C. 54). After that time Cicero evidently hesitates between abs te and a te, but during the last five or six years of his life a te became predominant in all his writings, even in his letters; consequently abs te appears but rarely in later authors, as in Liv. 10, 19, 8; 26, 15, 12;and who, perhaps, also used abs conscendentibus,
id. 28, 37, 2; v. Drakenb. ad. h. l. (Weissenb. ab).—Finally abs, in consequence of the following p, lost its b, and became ds- in the three compounds aspello, as-porto, and as-pernor (for asspernor); v. these words.—The late Lat. verb abbrevio may stand for adbrevio, the d of ad being assimilated to the following b.The fundamental signification of ab is departure from some fixed point (opp. to ad. which denotes motion to a point).In space, and,II.Fig., in time and other relations, in which the idea of departure from some point, as from source and origin, is included; Engl. from, away from, out of; down from; since, after; by, at, in, on, etc.I.Lit., in space: ab classe ad urbem tendunt, Att. ap. Non. 495, 22 (Trag. Rel. p. 177 Rib.):b.Caesar maturat ab urbe proficisci,
Caes. B. G. 1, 7:fuga ab urbe turpissima,
Cic. Att. 7, 21:ducite ab urbe domum, ducite Daphnim,
Verg. E. 8, 68. Cicero himself gives the difference between ab and ex thus: si qui mihi praesto fuerit cum armatis hominibus extra meum fundum et me introire prohibuerit, non ex eo, sed ab ( from, away from) eo loco me dejecerit....Unde dejecti Galli? A Capitolio. Unde, qui cum Graccho fucrunt? Ex Capitolio, etc., Cic. Caecin. 30, 87; cf. Diom. p. 408 P., and a similar distinction between ad and in under ad.—Ellipt.: Diogenes Alexandro roganti, ut diceret, si quid opus esset: Nunc quidem paululum, inquit, a sole, a little out of the sun, Cic. Tusc. 5, 32, 92. —Often joined with usque:illam (mulierem) usque a mari supero Romam proficisci,
all the way from, Cic. Clu. 68, 192; v. usque, I.—And with ad, to denote the space passed over: siderum genus ab ortu ad occasum commeant, from... to, Cic. N. D. 2, 19 init.; cf. ab... in:venti a laevo latere in dextrum, ut sol, ambiunt,
Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128.Sometimes with names of cities and small islands, or with domus (instead of the usual abl.), partie., in militnry and nautieal language, to denote the marching of soldiers, the setting out of a flcet, or the departure of the inhabitants from some place:c.oppidum ab Aenea fugiente a Troja conditum,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33:quemadmodum (Caesar) a Gergovia discederet,
Caes. B. G. 7, 43 fin.; so id. ib. 7, 80 fin.; Sall. J. 61; 82; 91; Liv. 2, 33, 6 al.; cf.:ab Arimino M. Antonium cum cohortibus quinque Arretium mittit,
Caes. B. C. 1, 11 fin.; and:protinus a Corfinio in Siciliam miserat,
id. ib. 1, 25, 2:profecti a domo,
Liv. 40, 33, 2;of setting sail: cum exercitus vestri numquam a Brundisio nisi hieme summa transmiserint,
Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 32; so id. Fam. 15, 3, 2; Caes. B. C. 3, 23; 3, 24 fin.:classe qua advecti ab domo fuerant,
Liv. 8, 22, 6;of citizens: interim ab Roma legatos venisse nuntiatum est,
Liv. 21, 9, 3; cf.:legati ab Orico ad M. Valerium praetorem venerunt,
id. 24, 40, 2.Sometimes with names of persons or with pronouns: pestem abige a me, Enn. ap. Cic. Ac. 2, 28, 89 (Trag. v. 50 Vahl.):B.Quasi ad adulescentem a patre ex Seleucia veniat,
Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 41; cf.:libertus a Fuflis cum litteris ad Hermippum venit,
Cic. Fl. 20, 47:Nigidium a Domitio Capuam venisse,
id. Att. 7, 24:cum a vobis discessero,
id. Sen. 22:multa merces tibi defluat ab Jove Neptunoque,
Hor. C. 1, 28, 29 al. So often of a person instead of his house, lodging, etc.: videat forte hic te a patre aliquis exiens, from the father, i. e. from his house, Ter. Heaut. 2, 2, 6:so a fratre,
id. Phorm. 5, 1, 5:a Pontio,
Cic. Att. 5, 3 fin.:ab ea,
Ter. And. 1, 3, 21; and so often: a me, a nobis, a se, etc., from my, our, his house, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 1, 7; Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 50; Cic. Att. 4, 9, 1 al.Transf., without the idea of motion. To designate separation or distance, with the verbs abesse, distare, etc., and with the particles longe, procul, prope, etc.1.Of separation:2.ego te afuisse tam diu a nobis dolui,
Cic. Fam. 2, 1, 2:abesse a domo paulisper maluit,
id. Verr. 2, 4, 18, § 39:tum Brutus ab Roma aberat,
Sall. C. 40, 5:absint lacerti ab stabulis,
Verg. G. 4, 14.—Of distance:3.quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,
Cic. Caecin. 10, 28; cf.:nos in castra properabamus, quae aberant bidui,
id. Att. 5, 16 fin.; and:hic locus aequo fere spatio ab castris Ariovisti et Caesaris aberat,
Caes. B. G. 1, 43, 1:terrae ab hujusce terrae, quam nos incolimus, continuatione distantes,
Cic. N. D. 2, 66, 164:non amplius pedum milibus duobus ab castris castra distabant,
Caes. B. C. 1, 82, 3; cf. id. lb. 1, 3, 103.—With adverbs: annos multos longinque ab domo bellum gerentes, Enn. ap. Non. 402, 3 (Trag. v. 103 Vahl.):cum domus patris a foro longe abesset,
Cic. Cael. 7, 18 fin.; cf.:qui fontes a quibusdam praesidiis aberant longius,
Caes. B. C. 3, 49, 5:quae procul erant a conspectu imperii,
Cic. Agr. 2, 32, 87; cf.:procul a castris hostes in collibus constiterunt,
Caes. B. G. 5, 17, 1; and:tu procul a patria Alpinas nives vides,
Verg. E. 10, 46 (procul often also with simple abl.;v. procul): cum esset in Italia bellum tam prope a Sicilia, tamen in Sicilia non fuit,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6; cf.:tu apud socrum tuam prope a meis aedibus sedebas,
id. Pis. 11, 26; and:tam prope ab domo detineri,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 3, § 6.—So in Caesar and Livy, with numerals to designate the measure of the distance:onerariae naves, quae ex eo loco ab milibus passuum octo vento tenebatur,
eight miles distant, Caes. B. G. 4, 22, 4; and without mentioning the terminus a quo: ad castra contenderunt, et ab milibus passunm minus duobus castra posuerunt, less than two miles off or distant, id. ib. 2, 7, 3; so id. ib. 2, 5, 32; 6, 7, 3; id. B. C. 1, 65; Liv. 38, 20, 2 (for which:duo milia fere et quingentos passus ab hoste posuerunt castra,
id. 37, 38, 5). —To denote the side or direction from which an object is viewed in its local relations,=a parte, at, on, in: utrum hacin feriam an ab laeva latus? Enn. ap. Plaut. Cist. 3, 10 (Trag. v. 38 Vahl.); cf.:II.picus et cornix ab laeva, corvos, parra ab dextera consuadent,
Plaut. As. 2, 1, 12: clamore ab ea parte audito. on this side, Caes. B. G. 3, 26, 4: Gallia Celtica attingit ab Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Rhenum, on the side of the Sequani, i. e. their country, id. ib. 1, 1, 5:pleraque Alpium ab Italia sicut breviora ita arrectiora sunt,
on the Italian side, Liv. 21, 35, 11:non eadem diligentia ab decumuna porta castra munita,
at the main entrance, Caes. B. G. 3, 25 fin.:erat a septentrionibus collis,
on the north, id. ib. 7, 83, 2; so, ab oriente, a meridie, ab occasu; a fronte, a latere, a tergo, etc. (v. these words).Fig.A.In time.1.From a [p. 3] point of time, without reference to the period subsequently elapsed. After:2.Exul ab octava Marius bibit,
Juv. 1,40:mulieres jam ab re divin[adot ] adparebunt domi,
immediately after the sucrifice, Plaut. Poen. 3, 3, 4:Caesar ab decimae legionis cohortatione ad dextrum cornu profectus,
Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:ab hac contione legati missi sunt,
immediately after, Liv. 24, 22, 6; cf. id. 28, 33, 1; 40, 47, 8; 40, 49, 1 al.:ab eo magistratu,
after this office, Sall. J. 63, 5:a summa spe novissima exspectabat,
after the greatest hope, Tac. A. 6, 50 fin. —Strengthened by the adverbs primum, confestim, statim, protinus, or the adj. recens, immediately after, soon after:ut primum a tuo digressu Romam veni,
Cic. Att. 1, 5, 4; so Suet. Tib. 68:confestim a proelio expugnatis hostium castris,
Liv. 30, 36, 1:statim a funere,
Suet. Caes. 85;and followed by statim: ab itinere statim,
id. ib. 60:protinus ab adoptione,
Vell. 2, 104, 3:Homerus qui recens ab illorum actate fuit,
soon after their time, Cic. N. D. 3, 5; so Varr. R. R. 2, 8, 2; Verg. A. 6, 450 al. (v. also primum, confestim, etc.).—Sometimes with the name of a person or place, instead of an action: ibi mihi tuae litterae binae redditae sunt tertio abs te die,
i. e. after their departure from you, Cic. Att. 5, 3, 1: in Italiam perventum est quinto mense a Carthagine Nov[adot ], i. e. after leaving (=postquam a Carthagine profecti sunt), Liv. 21, 38, 1:secundo Punico (bello) Scipionis classis XL. die a securi navigavit,
i. e. after its having been built, Plin. 16, 39, 74, § 192. —Hence the poct. expression: ab his, after this (cf. ek toutôn), i. e. after these words, hereupon, Ov. M. 3, 273; 4, 329; 8, 612; 9, 764.With reference to a subsequent period. From, since, after:b.ab hora tertia bibebatur,
from the third hour, Cic. Phil. 2, 41:infinito ex tempore, non ut antea, ab Sulla et Pompeio consulibus,
since the consulship of, id. Agr. 2, 21, 56:vixit ab omni aeternitate,
from all eternity, id. Div. 1, 51, 115:cum quo a condiscipulatu vivebat conjunctissime,
Nep. Att. 5, 3:in Lycia semper a terrae motu XL. dies serenos esse,
after an earthquake, Plin. 2, 96, 98, § 211 al.:centesima lux est haec ab interitu P. Clodii,
since the death of, Cic. Mil. 35, 98; cf.:cujus a morte quintus hic et tricesimus annus est,
id. Sen. 6, 19; and:ab incenso Capitolio illum esse vigesumiun annum,
since, Sall. C. 47, 2:diebus triginta, a qua die materia caesa est,
Caes. B. C. 1, 36.—Sometimes joined with usque and inde:quod augures omnes usque ab Romulo decreverunt,
since the time of, Cic. Vat. 8, 20:jam inde ab infelici pugna ceciderant animi,
from the very beginning of, Liv. 2, 65 fin. —Hence the adverbial expressions ab initio, a principio, a primo, at, in, or from the beginning, at first; v. initium, principium, primus. Likewise ab integro, anew, afresh; v. integer.—Ab... ad, from (a time)... to:ab hora octava ad vesperum secreto collocuti sumus,
Cic. Att. 7, 8, 4; cf.:cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit,
Caes. B. G. 1, 26, 2; and:a quo tempore ad vos consules anni sunt septingenti octoginta unus,
Vell. 1, 8, 4; and so in Plautus strengthened by usque:pugnata pugnast usque a mane ad vesperum,
from morning to evening, Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 97; id. Most. 3, 1, 3; 3, 2, 80.—Rarely ab... in: Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie, from... till late in the day, Liv. 27, 2, 9; so Col. 2, 10, 17; Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99; 2, 103, 106, § 229; 4, 12, 26, § 89.Particularly with nouns denoting a time of life:B.qui homo cum animo inde ab ineunte aetate depugnat suo,
from an early age, from early youth, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 24; so Cic. Off. 2, 13, 44 al.:mihi magna cum co jam inde a pueritia fuit semper famillaritas,
Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 9; so,a pueritia,
Cic. Tusc. 2, 11, 27 fin.; id. Fam. 5, 8, 4:jam inde ab adulescentia,
Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 16:ab adulescentia,
Cic. Rep. 2, 1:jam a prima adulescentia,
id. Fam. 1, 9, 23:ab ineunte adulescentia,
id. ib. 13, 21, 1; cf.followed by ad: usque ad hanc aetatem ab incunte adulescentia,
Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 20:a primis temporibus aetatis,
Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 3:a teneris unguiculis,
from childhood, id. ib. 1, 6, 2:usque a toga pura,
id. Att. 7, 8, 5:jam inde ab incunabulis,
Liv. 4, 36, 5:a prima lanugine,
Suet. Oth. 12:viridi ab aevo,
Ov. Tr. 4, 10, 17 al.;rarely of animals: ab infantia,
Plin. 10, 63, 83, § 182.—Instead of the nom. abstr. very often (like the Greek ek paioôn, etc.) with concrete substantives: a pucro, ab adulescente, a parvis, etc., from childhood, etc.:qui olim a puero parvulo mihi paedagogus fuerat,
Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 90; so,a pausillo puero,
id. Stich. 1, 3, 21:a puero,
Cic. Ac. 2, 36, 115; id. Fam. 13, 16, 4 (twice) al.:a pueris,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. de Or. 1, 1, 2 al.:ab adulescente,
id. Quint. 3, 12:ab infante,
Col. 1, 8, 2:a parva virgine,
Cat. 66, 26 al. —Likewise and in the same sense with adject.: a parvo, from a little child, or childhood, Liv. 1, 39, 6 fin.; cf.:a parvis,
Ter. And. 3, 3, 7; Cic. Leg. 2, 4, 9:a parvulo,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 8; id. Ad. 1, 1, 23; cf.:ab parvulis,
Caes. B. G. 6, 21, 3:ab tenero,
Col. 5, 6, 20;and rarely of animals: (vacca) a bima aut trima fructum ferre incipit,
Varr. R. R. 2, 1, 13.In other relations in which the idea of going forth, proceeding, from something is included.1.In gen. to denote departure, separation, deterring, avoiding, intermitting, etc., or distance, difference, etc., of inanimate or abstract things. From: jus atque aecum se a malis spernit procul, Enn. ap. Non. 399, 10 (Trag. v. 224 Vahl.):2.suspitionem et culpam ut ab se segregent,
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 42:qui discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 18:hic ab artificio suo non recessit,
id. ib. 1, 10, 20 al.:quod si exquiratur usque ab stirpe auctoritas,
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 180:condicionem quam ab te peto,
id. ib. 2, 4, 87; cf.:mercedem gloriae flagitas ab iis, quorum, etc.,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 15, 34:si quid ab illo acceperis,
Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 90:quae (i. e. antiquitas) quo propius aberat ab ortu et divina progenie,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 12, 26:ab defensione desistere,
Caes. B. C. 2, 12, 4:ne quod tempus ab opere intermitteretur,
id. B. G. 7, 24, 2:ut homines adulescentis a dicendi studio deterream,
Cic. de Or. 1, 25, 117, etc.—Of distance (in order, rank, mind, or feeling):qui quartus ab Arcesila fuit,
the fourth in succession from, Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 46:tu nunc eris alter ab illo,
next after him, Verg. E. 5, 49; cf.:Aiax, heros ab Achille secundus,
next in rank to, Hor. S. 2, 3, 193:quid hoc ab illo differt,
from, Cic. Caecin. 14, 39; cf.:hominum vita tantum distat a victu et cultu bestiarum,
id. Off. 2, 4, 15; and:discrepare ab aequitate sapientiam,
id. Rep. 3, 9 fin. (v. the verbs differo, disto, discrepo, dissideo, dissentio, etc.):quae non aliena esse ducerem a dignitate,
Cic. Fam. 4, 7:alieno a te animo fuit,
id. Deiot. 9, 24 (v. alienus). —So the expression ab re (qs. aside from the matter, profit; cf. the opposite, in rem), contrary to one's profit, to a loss, disadvantageous (so in the affirmative very rare and only ante-class.):subdole ab re consulit,
Plaut. Trin. 2, 1, 12; cf. id. Capt. 2, 2, 88; more frequently and class. (but not with Cicero) in the negative, non, haud, ab re, not without advantage or profit, not useless or unprofitable, adcantageous:haut est ab re aucupis,
Plaut. As. 1, 3, 71:non ab re esse Quinctii visum est,
Liv. 35, 32, 6; so Plin. 27, 8, 35; 31, 3, 26; Suet. Aug. 94; id. Dom. 11; Gell. 18, 14 fin.; App. Dogm. Plat. 3, p. 31, 22 al. (but in Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 44, ab re means with respect to the money matter).In partic.a.To denote an agent from whom an action proceeds, or by whom a thing is done or takes place. By, and in archaic and solemn style, of. So most frequently with pass. or intrans. verbs with pass. signif., when the active object is or is considered as a living being: Laudari me abs te, a laudato viro, Naev. ap. Cic. Tusc. 4, 31, 67: injuria abs te afficior, Enn. ap. Auct. Her. 2, 24, 38:b.a patre deductus ad Scaevolam,
Cic. Lael. 1, 1:ut tamquam a praesentibus coram haberi sermo videretur,
id. ib. 1, 3:disputata ab eo,
id. ib. 1, 4 al.:illa (i. e. numerorum ac vocum vis) maxime a Graecia vetere celebrata,
id. de Or. 3, 51, 197:ita generati a natura sumus,
id. Off. 1, 29, 103; cf.:pars mundi damnata a rerum natura,
Plin. 4, 12, 26, § 88:niagna adhibita cura est a providentia deorum,
Cic. N. D. 2, 51 al. —With intrans. verbs:quae (i. e. anima) calescit ab eo spiritu,
is warmed by this breath, Cic. N. D. 2, 55, 138; cf. Ov. M. 1, 417: (mare) qua a sole collucet, Cic. Ac. 2, 105:salvebis a meo Cicerone,
i. e. young Cicero sends his compliments to you, id. Att. 6, 2 fin.:a quibus (Atheniensibus) erat profectus,
i. e. by whose command, Nep. Milt. 2, 3:ne vir ab hoste cadat,
Ov. H. 9, 36 al. —A substantive or adjective often takes the place of the verb (so with de, q. v.):levior est plaga ab amico quam a debitore,
Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 7; cf.:a bestiis ictus, morsus, impetus,
id. Off. 2, 6, 19:si calor est a sole,
id. N. D. 2, 52:ex iis a te verbis (for a te scriptis),
id. Att. 16, 7, 5:metu poenae a Romanis,
Liv. 32, 23, 9:bellum ingens a Volscis et Aequis,
id. 3, 22, 2:ad exsolvendam fldem a consule,
id. 27, 5, 6.—With an adj.:lassus ab equo indomito,
Hor. S. 2, 2, 10:Murus ab ingenic notior ille tuo,
Prop. 5, 1, 126:tempus a nostris triste malis,
time made sad by our misfortunes, Ov. Tr. 4, 3, 36.—Different from per:vulgo occidebantur: per quos et a quibus?
by whom and upon whose orders? Cic. Rosc. Am. 29, 80 (cf. id. ib. 34, 97: cujus consilio occisus sit, invenio; cujus manu sit percussus, non laboro); so,ab hoc destitutus per Thrasybulum (i. e. Thrasybulo auctore),
Nep. Alc. 5, 4.—Ambiguity sometimes arises from the fact that the verb in the pass. would require ab if used in the active:si postulatur a populo,
if the people demand it, Cic. Off. 2, 17, 58, might also mean, if it is required of the people; on the contrary: quod ab eo (Lucullo) laus imperatoria non admodum exspectabatur, not since he did not expect military renown, but since they did not expect military renown from him, Cic. Ac. 2, 1, 2, and so often; cf. Rudd. II. p. 213. (The use of the active dative, or dative of the agent, instead of ab with the pass., is well known, Zumpt, § 419. It is very seldom found in prose writers of the golden age of Roman liter.; with Cic. sometimes joined with the participles auditus, cognitus, constitutus, perspectus, provisus, susceptus; cf. Halm ad Cic. Imp. Pomp. 24, 71, and ad ejusdem, Cat. 1, 7 fin.; but freq. at a later period; e. g. in Pliny, in Books 2-4 of H. N., more than twenty times; and likewise in Tacitus seventeen times. Vid. the passages in Nipperd. ad Tac. A. 2, 49.) Far more unusual is the simple abl. in the designation of persons:deseror conjuge,
Ov. H. 12, 161; so id. ib. 5, 75; id. M. 1, 747; Verg. A. 1, 274; Hor. C. 2, 4, 9; 1, 6, 2;and in prose,
Quint. 3, 4, 2; Sen. Contr. 2, 1; Curt. 6, 7, 8; cf. Rudd. II. p. 212; Zumpt ad Quint. V. p. 122 Spalding.—Hence the adverbial phrase a se=uph heautou, sua sponte, of one's own uccord, spontaneously:ipsum a se oritur et sua sponte nascitur,
Cic. Fin. 2, 24, 78:(urna) ab se cantat quoja sit,
Plaut. Rud. 2, 5, 21 (al. eapse; cf. id. Men. 1, 2, 66); so Col. 11, 1, 5; Liv. 44, 33, 6.With names of towns to denote origin, extraction, instead of gentile adjectives. From, of:c.pastores a Pergamide,
Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 1:Turnus ab Aricia,
Liv. 1, 50, 3 (for which Aricinus, id. 1, 51, 1):obsides dant trecentos principum a Cora atque Pometia liberos,
Liv. 2, 22, 2; and poet.: O longa mundi servator ab Alba, Auguste, thou who art descended from the old Alban race of kings (=oriundus, or ortus regibus Albanis), Prop. 5, 6, 37.In giving the etymology of a name: eam rem (sc. legem, Gr. nomon) illi Graeco putant nomine a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam, ego nostro a legendo, Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19: annum intervallum regni fuit: id ab re... interregnum appellatum, Liv. 1, 17, 6:d.(sinus maris) ab nomine propinquae urbis Ambracius appellatus,
id. 38, 4, 3; and so Varro in his Ling. Lat., and Pliny, in Books 1-5 of H. N., on almost every page. (Cf. also the arts. ex and de.)With verbs of beginning and repeating: a summo bibere, in Plaut. to drink in succession from the one at the head of the table:e.da, puere, ab summo,
Plaut. As. 5, 2, 41; so,da ab Delphio cantharum circum, id Most. 1, 4, 33: ab eo nobis causa ordienda est potissimum,
Cic. Leg. 1, 7, 21:coepere a fame mala,
Liv. 4, 12, 7:cornicem a cauda de ovo exire,
tail-foremost, Plin. 10, 16, 18:a capite repetis, quod quaerimus,
Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 18 al.With verbs of freeing from, defending, or protecting against any thing:f.a foliis et stercore purgato,
Cato, R. R. 65 (66), 1:tantumne ab re tuast oti tibi?
Ter. Heaut. 1, [p. 4] 1, 23; cf.:Saguntini ut a proeliis quietem habuerant,
Liv. 21, 11, 5:expiandum forum ab illis nefarii sceleris vestigiis,
Cic. Rab. Perd. 4, 11:haec provincia non modo a calamitate, sed etiam a metu calamitatis est defendenda,
id. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14 (v. defendo):ab incendio urbem vigiliis munitam intellegebat,
Sall. C. 32:ut neque sustinere se a lapsu possent,
Liv. 21, 35, 12:ut meam domum metueret atque a me ipso caveret,
Cic. Sest. 64, 133.With verbs of expecting, fearing, hoping, and the like, ab =a parte, as, Cic. Att. 9, 7, 4: cum eadem metuam ab hac parte, since I fear the same from this side; hence, timere, metuere ab aliquo, not, to be afraid of any one, but, to fear something (proceeding from) from him:g.el metul a Chryside,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 79; cf.:ab Hannibale metuens,
Liv. 23, 36; and:metus a praetore,
id. 23, 15, 7;v. Weissenb. ad h. l.: a quo quidem genere, judices, ego numquam timui,
Cic. Sull. 20, 59:postquam nec ab Romanis robis ulla est spes,
you can expect nothing from the Romans, Liv. 21, 13, 4.With verbs of fastening and holding:h.funiculus a puppi religatus,
Cic. Inv. 2, 51, 154:cum sinistra capillum ejus a vertice teneret,
Q. Cic. Pet. Cons. 3.Ulcisci se ab aliquo, to take vengeance on one:i.a ferro sanguis humanus se ulciscitur,
Plin. 34, 14, 41 fin.Cognoscere ab aliqua re to knoio or learn by means of something (different from ab aliquo, to learn from some one):j.id se a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse,
Caes. B. G. 1, 22.Dolere, laborare, valere ab, instead of the simple abl.:k.doleo ab animo, doleo ab oculis, doleo ab aegritudine,
Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 62:a morbo valui, ab animo aeger fui,
id. Ep. 1, 2, 26; cf. id. Aul. 2, 2, 9:a frigore et aestu ne quid laborent,
Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17; so,a frigore laborantibus,
Plin. 32, 10, 46, § 133; cf.:laborare ab re frumentaria,
Caes. B. G. 7, 10, 1; id. B. C. 3, 9; v. laboro.Where verbs and adjectives are joined with ab, instead of the simple abl., ab defines more exactly the respect in which that which is expressed by the verb or adj. is to be understood, in relation to, with regard to, in respect to, on the part of:l.ab ingenio improbus,
Plaut. Truc. 4, 3, 59:a me pudica'st,
id. Curc. 1, 1, 51:orba ab optimatibus contio,
Cic. Fl. 23, 54; ro Ov. H. 6,156: securos vos ab hac parte reddemus, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24 fin. (v. securus):locus copiosus a frumento,
Cic. Att. 5, 18, 2; cf.:sumus imparati cum a militibas tum a pecunia,
id. ib. 7, 15 fin.:ille Graecus ab omni laude felicior,
id. Brut. 16, 63:ab una parte haud satis prosperuin,
Liv. 1, 32, 2 al.;so often in poets ab arte=arte,
artfully, Tib. 1, 5, 4; 1, 9, 66; Ov. Am. 2, 4, 30.In the statement of the motive instead of ex, propter, or the simple abl. causae, from, out of, on account of, in consequence of: ab singulari amore scribo, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 7, B fin.:m.linguam ab irrisu exserentem,
thrusting out the tongue in derision, Liv. 7, 10, 5:ab honore,
id. 1, 8; so, ab ira, a spe, ab odio, v. Drak. ad Liv. 24, 30, 1: 26, 1, 3; cf. also Kritz and Fabri ad Sall. J. 31, 3, and Fabri ad Liv. 21, 36, 7.Especially in the poets instead of the gen.:n.ab illo injuria,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 129:fulgor ab auro,
Lucr. 2, 5:dulces a fontibus undae,
Verg. G. 2, 243.In indicating a part of the whole, for the more usual ex, of, out of:o.scuto ab novissimis uni militi detracto,
Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:nonnuill ab novissimis,
id. ib.; Cic. Sest. 65, 137; cf. id. ib. 59 fin.: a quibus (captivis) ad Senatum missus (Regulus).In marking that from which any thing proceeds, and to which it belongs:p.qui sunt ab ea disciplina,
Cic. Tusc. 2, 3, 7:ab eo qui sunt,
id. Fin. 4, 3, 7:nostri illi a Platone et Aristotele aiunt,
id. Mur. 30, 63 (in imitation of oi upo tinos).To designate an office or dignity (with or without servus; so not freq. till after the Aug. period;q.in Cic. only once): Pollex, servus a pedibus meus,
one of my couriers, Cic. Att. 8, 5, 1; so,a manu servus,
a secretary, Suet. Caes. 74: Narcissum ab eplstulis ( secretary) et Pallantem a rationibus ( accountant), id. Claud. 28; and so, ab actis, ab admissione, ab aegris, ab apotheca, ab argento, a balneis, a bibliotheca, a codicillis, a jumentis, a potione, etc. (v. these words and Inscr. Orell. vol. 3, Ind. xi. p. 181 sq.).The use of ab before adverbs is for the most part peculiar to later Latinity:► a.a peregre,
Vitr. 5, 7 (6), 8:a foris,
Plin. 17, 24, 37; Vulg. Gen, 7, 16; ib. Matt. 23, 27:ab intus,
ib. ib. 7, 15:ab invicem,
App. Herb. 112; Vulg. Matt. 25, 32; Cypr. Ep. 63, 9: Hier. Ep. 18:a longe,
Hyg. Fab. 257; Vulg. Gen. 22, 4; ib. Matt. 26, 58:a modo,
ib. ib. 23, 39;Hier. Vit. Hilar.: a nune,
Vulg. Luc. 1, 48:a sursum,
ib. Marc. 15, 38.Ab is not repeated like most other prepositions (v. ad, ex, in, etc.) with pron. interrog. or relat. after subst. and pron. demonstr. with ab:b.Arsinoen, Stratum, Naupactum...fateris ab hostibus esse captas. Quibus autem hostibus? Nempe iis, quos, etc.,
Cic. Pis. 37, 91:a rebus gerendis senectus abstrahit. Quibus? An iis, quae in juventute geruntur et viribus?
id. Sen. 6:a Jove incipiendum putat. Quo Jove?
id. Rep. 1, 36, 56:res publica, quascumque vires habebit, ab iis ipsis, quibus tenetur, de te propediem impetrabit,
id. Fam. 4, 13, 5.—Ab in Plantus is once put after the word which it governs: quo ab, As. 1, 1, 106.—c.It is in various ways separated from the word which it governs:d.a vitae periculo,
Cic. Brut. 91, 313:a nullius umquam me tempore aut commodo,
id. Arch. 6, 12:a minus bono,
Sall. C. 2, 6:a satis miti principio,
Liv. 1, 6, 4:damnis dives ab ipsa suis,
Ov. H. 9, 96; so id. ib. 12, 18; 13, 116.—The poets join a and que, making aque; but in good prose que is annexed to the following abl. (a meque, abs teque, etc.):e.aque Chao,
Verg. G. 4, 347:aque mero,
Ov. M. 3, 631:aque viro,
id. H. 6, 156:aque suis,
id. Tr. 5, 2, 74 al. But:a meque,
Cic. Fam. 2, 16, 1:abs teque,
id. Att. 3, 15, 4:a teque,
id. ib. 8, 11, §7: a primaque adulescentia,
id. Brut. 91, 315 al. —A Greek noun joined with ab stands in the dat.: a parte negotiati, hoc est pragmatikê, removisse, Quint. 3, 7, 1.III.In composition ab,1.Retains its original signif.: abducere, to take or carry away from some place: abstrahere, to draw auay; also, downward: abicere, to throw down; and denoting a departure from the idea of the simple word, it has an effect apparently privative: absimilis, departing from the similar, unlike: abnormis, departing from the rule, unusual (different from dissimilis, enormis); and so also in amens=a mente remotus, alienus ( out of one's senses, without self-control, insane): absurdus, missounding, then incongruous, irrational: abutor (in one of its senses), to misuse: aborior, abortus, to miscarry: abludo; for the privative force the Latin regularly employs in-, v. 2. in.—2.It more rarely designates completeness, as in absorbere, abutor ( to use up). (The designation of the fourth generation in the ascending or descending line by ab belongs here only in appearance; as abavus for quartus pater, great-great-grandfather, although the Greeks introduced upopappos; for the immutability of the syllable ab in abpatrnus and abmatertera, as well as the signif. Of the word abavus, grandfather's grandfather, imitated in abnepos, grandchild's grandchild, seems to point to a derivation from avi avus, as Festus, p. 13 Mull., explains atavus, by atta avi, or, rather, attae avus.) -
7 vivre
vivre [vivʀ]➭ TABLE 461. intransitive verba. to live• quand l'ambulance est arrivée, il vivait encore he was still alive when the ambulance arrived• vivre à Londres/en France to live in London/in France• vivre dans le passé/dans la crainte to live in the past/in fear• être facile/difficile à vivre to be easy/difficult to get on with• vivre de laitages/de rentes to live on dairy produce/a private income• travailler/écrire pour vivre to work/write for a living• faire vivre qn [personne] to support sb• elle ne vit plus depuis que son fils est pilote she's been living on her nerves since her son became a pilotb. [idée, rue, paysage] to be alive2. transitive verba. ( = passer) to spendb. [+ événement, guerre] to live through3. plural masculine noun* * *vivʀ
1.
1) ( connaître) to live through [époque, période]; to go through [heures difficiles, enfer]; to experience [amour, passion]2) ( ressentir) to cope with [divorce, échec]
2.
verbe intransitif1) Biologie ( être vivant) to livevivre vieux/centenaire — to live to a great age/to be a hundred
cesser de vivre — euph to pass away
vive moi/nous! — three cheers for me/us!
2) ( habiter) to liveêtre facile à vivre — [conjoint] to be easy to live with; [ami] to be easy to get on with
3) ( exister) [personne] to liveapprendre à vivre à quelqu'un — (colloq) to teach somebody some manners (colloq)
savoir vivre — ( profiter de la vie) to know how to enjoy life
4) ( survivre) [personne] to live5) ( durer) [relation, mode] to lastavoir vécu — [personne] to have seen a great deal of life; ( être usé) hum to have had its day
6) ( être animé) [ville, rue] to be full of life••* * *vivʀ1. vi1) (= résider) to liveJ'aimerais vivre à l'étranger. — I'd like to live abroad.
Je vis en Écosse. — I live in Scotland.
Il vit chez ses parents. — He lives with his parents.
Il a vécu à Paris pendant dix ans. — He lived in Paris for ten years.
2) (= être vivant) to be aliveavoir vécu; Ce régime a vécu. — This regime has had its day.
3) (= exister, mener son existence) to liveOn vit de plus en plus longtemps. — People are living longer and longer.
se laisser vivre — to let o.s. go
ne plus vivre (= être anxieux) — to live on one's nerves
Il a vécu. — He has seen life.
4) (= subsister) to liveIls avaient à peine de quoi vivre. — They had barely enough to live on.
vivre de [salaire, allocations] — to live on
vivre mal (= chichement) — to have a meagre existence
2. vt1) [vie] to live, [aventures] to go through, [temps] to spendIls y ont vécu des jours heureux. — They spent some happy times there.
2) (= ressentir)Il a très mal vécu son licenciement. — He took his redundancy very hard.
3. nm4. vivres nmplprovisions, food supplies* * *vivre verb table: vivreA vtr1 ( connaître) to live through [époque, période]; to go through [heures difficiles, cauchemar, enfer]; to experience [amour, passion]; vivre son mariage comme un sacrifice to view one's marriage as self-sacrifice; être vécu comme un affront to be taken as an insult; vivre une vie tranquille/agitée to lead a quiet/hectic life; la vie vaut d'être vécue life is worth living; vivre sa vie to lead one's own life;2 ( ressentir) to cope with [divorce, échec, changement]; comment as-tu vécu votre séparation? how did you cope with your separation?; vivre sa foi to put one's faith into practiceGB?B vi1 Biol ( être vivant) [personne, animal, plante] to live; vivre longtemps/vieux/centenaire to live for a long time/to a great age/to be a hundred; cesser de vivre euph to pass away; vive la révolution/le président! long live the revolution/the president!; vive(nt) les vacances! three cheers for the holidays GB ou the vacation US!; vive la vie! life is wonderful!; vive moi/nous! three cheers for me/us!; vive Paul! hurray for Paul!;2 ( habiter) [personne, animal, plante] to live; vivre à la campagne/en démocratie to live in the country/in a democracy; il vit avec quelqu'un he's living with somebody; vivre à cinq dans une chambre to live five to a room; être facile/difficile à vivre [conjoint, concubin] to be easy/difficult to live with; [ami, collègue] to be easy/difficult to get on with; vivre les uns sur les autres to live on top of each other;3 ( exister) [personne] to live; vivre en ermite to live like a hermit; vivre dans la crainte/pour ses enfants to live in fear/for one's children; vivre avec son temps to move with the times; vivre à contre-courant to go one's own way; vivre en pyjama to live in one's pyjamas GB ou pajamas US; se laisser vivre to take things easy; apprendre à qn à vivre○ to teach sb some manners○; savoir vivre ( profiter de la vie) to know how to enjoy life; ( être poli) to know how things are done;4 ( survivre) [personne] to live; bien vivre to live well; vivre de peu to live on very little; de quoi vit-elle? what does she live on?; avoir de quoi vivre to have enough to live on; vivre avec presque rien/sur son capital/de la charité to live on next to nothing/on one's capital/on charity; vivre de légumes to live on vegetables; vivre sur sa réputation to live on one's reputation; vivre de ses rentes to have a private income; faire vivre qn ( matériellement) to keep sb; vivre aux dépens de qn to live off sb; vivre d'espoir to live in hope; qu'est-ce qui te fait vivre? what keeps you going?;5 ( durer) [relation, mode, idéologie] to last; le gouvernement ne vivra pas longtemps the government won't last long; avoir vécu [personne] to have seen a great deal of life; hum ( être usé) [objet, idée] to have had its day; mes chaussures ont vécu my shoes have had their day; leur souvenir vivra dans nos mémoires their memory will live on in our hearts;6 ( être animé) [ville, rue] to be full of life.C se vivre vpr ( être ressenti) le divorce se vit souvent très mal divorce is often very hard to cope with.D vivres nmpl1 ( nourriture) food, supplies;2 ( moyens de subsistance) couper les vivres à qn to cut off sb's allowance.le vivre et le couvert board and lodging; vivre de l'air du temps to live on air; vivre sur un grand pied to live in great style; qui vivra verra what will be will be.I[vivr] nom masculin————————vivres nom masculin plurielII[vivr] verbe intransitif[cellule, plante] to livevivre vieux ou longtemps to live to a great age ou ripe old age2. [mener une existence] to livevivre à l'heure de l'Europe/du XXIe siècle to live in the world of the European community/of the 21st centuryvivre dans le luxe/l'angoisse to live in luxury/anxietyne vivre que pour la musique/sa famille to live only for music/one's familyil fait bon vivre ici life is good ou it's a good life herea. [on est inquiet] we're worried sickb. [on est harassé] this isn't a life, this isn't what you can call livinga. [il est impoli] he has no mannersb. [il est trop nerveux] he doesn't know how to enjoy life3. [résider] to livevivre au Brésil/dans un château to live in Brazil/in a castlevivre dans une ou en communauté to live communally ou in a communitya. [maritalement] to live with somebodyb. [en amis] to share ou to live with somebodyvivre ensemble [couple non marié] to live togetherêtre facile à vivre to be easygoing ou easy to get on with4. [subsister] to livevivre sur un seul salaire to live ou to exist on just one salarya. [personne] to provide a living for ou to support a familyb. [commerce] to provide a living for a familyvivre bien/chichement to have a good/poor standard of livingils vivaient de la cueillette et de la chasse they lived on what they gathered and hunted ou off the landil faut bien vivre! one's got to keep the wolf from the door ou to live (somehow)!5. [se perpétuer - croyance, coutume] to be alive6. [donner l'impression de vie - sculpture, tableau]————————[vivr] verbe transitif1. [passer par - époque, événement] to live through (inseparable)vivre des temps difficiles to live through ou to experience difficult timesvivre des jours heureux/paisibles to spend one's days happily/peacefully2. [assumer - divorce, grossesse, retraite] to experienceelle a mal/bien vécu mon départ she couldn't cope/she coped well after I left3. (locution) -
8 of
prepositiona friend of mine/the vicar's — ein Freund von mir/des Pfarrers
it's no business of theirs — es geht sie nichts an
where's that pencil of mine? — wo ist mein Bleistift?
2) (indicating starting point) vonwithin a mile of the centre — nicht weiter als eine Meile vom Zentrum entfernt
3) (indicating origin, cause)it was clever of you to do that — es war klug von dir, das zu tun
4) (indicating material) ausbe made of... — aus... [hergestellt] sein
5) (indicating closer definition, identity, or contents)the city of Chicago — die Stadt Chicago
increase of 10 % — Zuwachs/Erhöhung von zehn Prozent
battle of Hastings — Schlacht von od. bei Hastings
your letter of 2 January — Ihr Brief vom 2. Januar
be of value/interest to — von Nutzen/von Interesse od. interessant sein für
the whole of... — der/die/das ganze...
6) (indicating concern, reference)inform somebody of something — jemanden über etwas (Akk.) informieren
well, what of it? — (asked as reply) na und?
7) (indicating objective relation)his love of his father — seine Liebe zu seinem Vater
9) (indicating classification, selection) vonhe of all men — (most unsuitably) ausgerechnet er; (especially) gerade er
of an evening — (coll.) abends
* * *[əv]1) (belonging to: a friend of mine.) von2) (away from (a place etc); after (a given time): within five miles of London; within a year of his death.) von3) (written etc by: the plays of Shakespeare.) von4) (belonging to or forming a group: He is one of my friends.) von5) (showing: a picture of my father.) von6) (made from; consisting of: a dress of silk; a collection of pictures.) aus8) (about: an account of his work.) von9) (containing: a box of chocolates.) mit10) (used to show a cause: She died of hunger.) an11) (used to show a loss or removal: She was robbed of her jewels.) Genitiv12) (used to show the connection between an action and its object: the smoking of a cigarette.) Genitiv13) (used to show character, qualities etc: a man of courage.) mit14) ((American) (of time) a certain number of minutes before (the hour): It's ten minutes of three.) vor* * *of[ɒv, əv, AM ɑ:v, əv]people \of this island Menschen von dieser Inselthe language \of this country die Sprache dieses Landesthe cause \of the disease die Krankheitsursachethe colour \of her hair ihre Haarfarbethe government \of India die indische Regierunga friend \of mine ein Freund von mirsmoking is the worst habit \of mine Rauchen ist meine schlimmste Angewohnheitthis revolting dog \of hers ihr widerlicher Hundthe smell \of roses Rosenduft man admirer \of Picasso ein Bewunderer Picassosfive \of her seven kids are boys fünf ihrer sieben Kinder sind Jungenthere were ten \of us on the trip wir waren auf der Reise zu zehntnine \of the children came to the show neun Kinder kamen zur Vorstellungcan you please give me more \of the beans? könntest du mir noch etwas von den Bohnen geben?I don't want to hear any more \of that! ich will nichts mehr davon hören!he's the best-looking \of the three brothers er sieht von den drei Brüdern am besten ausa third \of the people ein Drittel der Leutethe whole \of the garden der ganze Gartenthe best \of friends die besten Freundethe days \of the week die Wochentageall \of us wir alleall \of us were tired wir waren alle müde\of all von allenbest \of all, I liked the green one am besten gefiel mir der grünethat \of all his films is my favourite er gefällt mir von allen seinen Filmen am bestenboth \of us wir beidemost \of them die meisten von ihnenone \of the cleverest eine(r) der Schlauestenhe's one \of the smartest \of the smart er ist einer der Klügsten unter den Klugena bunch \of parsley ein Bund Petersilie nta clove \of garlic eine Knoblauchzehea cup \of tea eine Tasse Teea drop \of rain ein Regentropfenhundreds \of people Hunderte von Menschena kilo \of apples ein Kilo Äpfel nta litre \of water ein Liter Wasser ma lot \of money eine Menge Gelda piece \of cake ein Stück Kuchena pride \of lions ein Rudel Löwen [o Löwenrudel] ntthe sweater is made \of the finest lambswool der Pullover ist aus feinster Schafwollea land \of ice and snow ein Land aus Eis und Schneedresses \of lace and silk Kleider aus Spitze und Seidea house \of stone ein Steinhaus, ein Haus aus Steina book \of short stories ein Buch mit Kurzgeschichtenthat was stupid \of me das war dumm von mirthe massacre \of hundreds \of innocent people das Massaker an Hunderten von Menschenthe destruction \of the rain forest die Zerstörung des Regenwaldsthe anguish \of the murdered child's parents die Qualen der Eltern des ermordeten Kindesthe suffering \of millions das Leiden von Millionento die \of sth an etw dat sterbenhe died \of cancer er starb an Krebs\of one's own free will aus freien Stücken, freiwillig\of oneself von selbstshe would never do such a thing \of herself so etwas würde sie nie von alleine tunthe works \of Shakespeare die Werke Shakespearesshe is \of noble birth sie ist adliger Abstammungwe will notify you \of any further changes wir werden Sie über alle Änderungen informierenhe was accused \of fraud er wurde wegen Betrugs angeklagtI know \of a guy who could fix that for you ich kenne jemanden, der das für dich reparieren kann\of her childhood, we know very little wir wissen nur sehr wenig über ihre Kindheitlet's not speak \of this matter lass uns nicht über die Sache redenspeaking \of sb/sth,... wo [o da] wir gerade von jdm/etw sprechen,...speaking \of time, do you have a watch on? da wir gerade von der Zeit reden, hast du eine Uhr?she's often unsure \of herself sie ist sich ihrer selbst oft nicht sicherI'm really appreciative \of all your help ich bin dir für all deine Hilfe wirklich dankbarhe was worthy \of the medal er hatte die Medaille verdientI am certain \of that ich bin mir dessen sicherthis is not uncharacteristic \of them das ist für sie nichts Ungewöhnlichesto be afraid \of sb/sth vor jdm/etw Angst habento be fond \of swimming gerne schwimmento be jealous \of sb auf jdn eifersüchtig seinto be sick \of sth etw satthaben, von etw dat genug habenthere was no warning \of the danger es gab keine Warnung vor der Gefahrhe has a love \of music er liebt die Musikhe's a doctor \of medicine er ist Doktor der Medizinthe idea \of a just society die Idee einer gerechten Gesellschaftthe memories \of her school years die Erinnerungen an ihre Schuljahrethe pain \of separation der Trennungsschmerzit's a problem \of space das ist ein Raumproblemhis promises \of loyalty seine Treueversprechento be in search \of sb/sth auf der Suche nach jdm/etw seinshe's in search \of a man sie sucht einen Mannthoughts \of revenge Rachegedanken pl▪ what \of sb? was ist mit jdm?and what \of Adrian? was macht eigentlich Adrian?what \of it? was ist schon dabei?, na und?on the point [or verge] \of doing sth kurz davor [o im Begriff] sein, etw zu tunI'm on the point \of telling him off ich werde ihn jetzt gleich rausschmeißenin the back \of the car hinten im Autothe zipper was on the back \of the dress der Reißverschluss war hinten am Kleidon the corner \of the street an der Straßeneckeon the left \of the picture links auf dem Bilda lake north/south \of the city ein See im Norden/Süden der StadtI've never been north \of Edinburgh ich war noch nie nördlich von Edinburghon the top \of his head [oben] auf seinem Kopfa rise \of 2% in inflation ein Inflationsanstieg von 2 Prozentthe stocks experienced an average rise \of 5% die Aktien sind im Durchschnitt um 5 % gestiegenat the age \of six im Alter von sechs Jahrenhe's a man \of about 50 er ist um die 50 Jahre altI hate this kind \of party ich hasse diese Art von Partythe city \of Prague die Stadt Pragshe has the face \of an angel sie hat ein Gesicht wie ein Engelthe grace \of a dancer die Anmut einer Tänzerinthe love \of a good woman die Liebe einer guten Fraushe gave a scream \of terror sie stieß einen Schrei des Entsetzens ausa man \of honour ein Mann von Ehrea moment \of silence ein Moment m der StilleI want a few minutes \of quiet! ich will ein paar Minuten Ruhe!a subject \of very little interest ein sehr wenig beachtetes Themaa woman \of great charm and beauty eine Frau von großer Wärme und Schönheitwe live within a mile \of the city centre wir wohnen eine Meile vom Stadtzentrum entferntshe came within two seconds \of beating the world record sie hat den Weltrekord nur um zwei Sekunden verfehltI got married back in June \of 1957 ich habe im Juni 1957 geheiratetthe eleventh \of March der elfte Märzthe first \of the month der erste [Tag] des Monatsthe most memorable events \of the past decade die wichtigsten Ereignisse des letzten Jahrzehntsthey were robbed \of all their savings ihnen wurden alle Ersparnisse geraubtI've him \of that nasty little habit ich habe ihm diese dumme Angewohnheit abgewöhnthis mother had deprived him \of love seine Mutter hat ihm ihre Liebe vorenthaltento get rid \of sb jdn loswerdenthe room was devoid \of all furnishings der Raum war ganz ohne Möbelthis complete idiot \of a man dieser Vollidiotthe month \of June der Monat Junithe name \of Brown der Name Brownshe died \of a Sunday morning sie starb an einem SonntagmorgenI like to relax with my favourite book \of an evening ich entspanne mich abends gerne mit meinem Lieblingsbuch\of late in letzter Zeitit's quarter \of five es ist viertel vor fünf [o BRD drei viertel fünf26.▶ \of all geradeJane, \of all people, is the last one I'd expect to see at the club gerade Jane ist die letzte, die ich in dem Klub erwartet hätteI can't understand why you live in Ireland, \of all places ich kann nicht verstehen, warum du ausgerechnet in Irland lebsttoday \of all days ausgerechnet heute▶ \of all the cheek [or nerve] das ist doch die Höhe!▶ to be \of sth:she is \of the opinion that doctors are only out to experiment sie glaubt, Ärzte möchten nur herumexperimentierenthis work is \of great interest and value diese Arbeit ist sehr wichtig und wertvoll* * *[ɒv, əv]prep1) (indicating possession or relation) von (+dat), use of genthe wife of the doctor — die Frau des Arztes, die Frau vom Arzt
a friend of ours — ein Freund/eine Freundin von uns
a painting of the Queen — ein Gemälde nt der or von der Königin
the first of the month — der Erste (des Monats), der Monatserste
that damn dog of theirs (inf) — ihr verdammter Hund (inf)
it is very kind of you —
it was nasty of him to say that — es war gemein von ihm, das zu sagen
2)(indicating separation in space or time)
south of Paris — südlich von Paris3)he died of poison/cancer — er starb an Gift/Krebshe died of hunger — er verhungerte, er starb hungers
4)he was cured of the illness — er wurde von der Krankheit geheilt5) (indicating material) ausdress made of wool — Wollkleid nt, Kleid nt aus Wolle
6)(indicating quality, identity etc)
house of ten rooms — Haus nt mit zehn Zimmernman of courage — mutiger Mensch, Mensch m mit Mut
girl of ten — zehnjähriges Mädchen, Mädchen nt von zehn Jahren
7)fear of God — Gottesfurcht fhe is a leader of men —
8)(subjective genitive)
love of God for man — Liebe Gottes zu den Menschen9)(partitive genitive)
the whole of the house — das ganze Hausthere were six of us — wir waren zu sechst, wir waren sechs
he asked the six of us to lunch — er lud uns sechs zum Mittagessen ein
the bravest of the brave —
he drank of the wine (liter) — er trank von dem Weine (liter)
10)(= concerning)
what do you think of him? — was halten Sie von ihm?= by)
forsaken of men — von allen verlassen12)he's become very quiet of late — er ist letztlich or seit Neuestem so ruhig geworden* * *of [ɒv; əv; US əv; ɑv] präp1. allg vonthe tail of the dog der Schwanz des Hundes;the tail of a dog der oder ein Hundeschwanz;the folly of his action die Dummheit seiner Handlung3. Ort: bei:4. Entfernung, Trennung, Befreiung:a) von:south of London südlich von London;within ten miles of London im Umkreis von 10 Meilen um London;cure (rid) of sth von etwas heilen (befreien)b) (gen) he was robbed of his wallet er wurde seiner Brieftasche beraubt, ihm wurde die Brieftasche geraubtc) um:5. Herkunft: von, aus:of good family aus einer guten Familie;Mr X of London Mr. X aus Londona friend of mine ein Freund von mir, einer meiner Freunde;that red nose of his seine rote Nase7. Eigenschaft: von, mit:a man of courage ein mutiger Mann, ein Mann mit Mut;a man of no importance ein unbedeutender Mensch;a fool of a man ein (ausgemachter) Narr8. Stoff: aus, von:a dress of silk ein Kleid aus oder von Seide, ein Seidenkleid;(made) of steel aus Stahl (hergestellt), stählern, Stahl…9. Urheberschaft, Art und Weise: von:of o.s. von selbst, von sich aus;he has a son of his first marriage er hat einen Sohn aus erster Ehe10. Ursache, Grund:a) von, an (dat):die of cancer an Krebs sterbenb) aus:c) vor (dat): → academic.ru/1052/afraid">afraidd) auf (akk):e) über (akk):f) nach:it is true of every case das trifft in jedem Fall zu12. Thema:a) von, über (akk):b) an (akk):13. Apposition, im Deutschen nicht ausgedrückt:a) the city of London die Stadt London;the month of April der Monat Aprilb) Maß:a piece of meat ein Stück Fleisch14. Genitivus obiectivus:a) zu:c) bei:an audience of the king eine Audienz beim König15. Zeit:a) umg an (dat), in (dat):of an evening eines Abends;of late years in den letzten Jahrenb) von:your letter of March 3rd Ihr Schreiben vom 3. März* * *preposition1) (indicating belonging, connection, possession)a friend of mine/the vicar's — ein Freund von mir/des Pfarrers
2) (indicating starting point) von3) (indicating origin, cause)it was clever of you to do that — es war klug von dir, das zu tun
4) (indicating material) ausbe made of... — aus... [hergestellt] sein
5) (indicating closer definition, identity, or contents)increase of 10 % — Zuwachs/Erhöhung von zehn Prozent
battle of Hastings — Schlacht von od. bei Hastings
your letter of 2 January — Ihr Brief vom 2. Januar
be of value/interest to — von Nutzen/von Interesse od. interessant sein für
the whole of... — der/die/das ganze...
6) (indicating concern, reference)inform somebody of something — jemanden über etwas (Akk.) informieren
well, what of it? — (asked as reply) na und?
8) (indicating description, quality, condition)9) (indicating classification, selection) vonhe of all men — (most unsuitably) ausgerechnet er; (especially) gerade er
of an evening — (coll.) abends
* * *prep.aus präp.von präp.vor präp.über präp. -
9 surmonter
surmonter [syʀmɔ̃te]➭ TABLE 11. transitive verba. ( = être au-dessus de) to topb. [+ obstacle, difficultés, dégoût, peur] to overcome2. reflexive verb► se surmonter [personne] to control o.s.* * *syʀmɔ̃te1) ( dépasser) to overcome [obstacle, crise]2) ( être placé au-dessus de)* * *syʀmɔ̃te vt1) (= vaincre) to overcomeIl nous reste de nombreux obstacles à surmonter. — We still have many obstacles to overcome.
2) (= être au-dessus de) to be on top of* * *surmonter verb table: aimerA vtr1 ( dépasser) to overcome [obstacle, problème, crise, contradiction, méfiance]; surmonter l'épreuve de la séparation to get through ou survive (the ordeal of) separation;2 ( être placé au-dessus de) être surmonté de qch to be topped ou surmounted by sth; un dôme surmonte la tour the tower is topped ou surmounted by a dome.B se surmonter vpr ( se dépasser) les déceptions/problèmes se surmontent disappointments/problems can be overcome.[syrmɔ̃te] verbe transitif2. [triompher de - difficulté] to get over, to surmount, to overcome ; [ - peur, émotion] to overcome, to get the better of, to master ; [ - fatigue] to overcome -
10 ā
ā (before consonants), ab (before vowels, h, and some consonants, esp. l, n, r, s), abs (usu. only before t and q, esp. freq. before the pron. te), old af, praep. with abl., denoting separation or departure (opp. ad). I. Lit., in space, from, away from, out of. A. With motion: ab urbe proficisci, Cs.: a supero mari Flaminia (est via), leads: Nunc quidem paululum, inquit, a sole, a little out of the sun: usque a mari supero Romam proficisci, all the way from; with names of cities and small islands, or with domo, home (for the simple abl; of motion, away from, not out of, a place); hence, of raising a siege, of the march of soldiers, the setting out of a fleet, etc.: oppidum ab Aeneā fugiente a Troiā conditum: ab Alesiā, Cs.: profectus ab Orico cum classe, Cs.; with names of persons or with pronouns: cum a vobis discessero: videat forte hic te a patre aliquis exiens, i. e. from his house, T.; (praegn.): a rege munera repudiare, from, sent by, N.— B. Without motion. 1. Of separation or distance: abesse a domo paulisper maluit: tum Brutus ab Romā aberat, S.: hic locus aequo fere spatio ab castris Ariovisti et Caesaris aberat, Cs.: a foro longe abesse: procul a castris hostes in collibus constiterunt, Cs.: cum esset bellum tam prope a Siciliā; so with numerals to express distance: ex eo loco ab milibus passuum octo, eight miles distant, Cs.: ab milibus passuum minus duobus castra posuerunt, less than two miles off, Cs.; so rarely with substantives: quod tanta machinatio ab tanto spatio instrueretur, so far away, Cs.— 2. To denote a side or direction, etc., at, on, in: ab sinistrā parte nudatis castris, on the left, Cs.: ab eā parte, quā, etc., on that side, S.: Gallia Celtica attingit ab Sequanis flumen Rhenum, on the side of the Sequani, i. e. their country, Cs.: ab decumanā portā castra munita, at the main entrance, Cs.: crepuit hinc a Glycerio ostium, of the house of G., T.: (cornua) ab labris argento circumcludunt, on the edges, Cs.; hence, a fronte, in the van; a latere, on the flank; a tergo, in the rear, behind; a dextro cornu, on the right wing; a medio spatio, half way.— II. Fig. A. Of time. 1. Of a point of time, after: Caesar ab decimae legionis cohortatione ad dextrum cornu profectus, immediately after, Cs.: ab eo magistratu, after this office, S.: recens a volnere Dido, fresh from her wound, V.: in Italiam perventum est quinto mense a Carthagine, i. e. after leaving, L.: ab his, i. e. after these words, hereupon, O.: ab simili <*>ade domo profugus, i. e. after and in consequence of, L.— 2. Of a period of time, from, since, after: ab hora tertiā bibebatur, from the third hour: ab Sullā et Pompeio consulibus, since the consulship of: ab incenso Capitolio illum esse vigesumum annum, since, S.: augures omnes usque ab Romulo, since the time of: iam inde ab infelici pugnā ceciderant animi, from (and in consequence of), L.; hence, ab initio, a principio, a primo, at, in, or from the beginning, at first: ab integro, anew, afresh: ab... ad, from (a time)... to: cum ab horā septimā ad vesperum pugnatum sit, Cs.; with nouns or adjectives denoting a time of life: iam inde a pueritiā, T.: a pueritiā: a pueris: iam inde ab incunabulis, L.: a parvo, from a little child, or childhood, L.: ab parvulis, Cs.— B. In other relations. 1. To denote separation, deterring, intermitting, distinction, difference, etc., from: quo discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem: propius abesse ab ortu: alter ab illo, next after him, V.: Aiax, heros ab Achille secundus, next in rank to, H.: impotentia animi a temperantiā dissidens: alieno a te animo fuit, estranged; so with adjj. denoting free, strange, pure, etc.: res familiaris casta a cruore civili: purum ab humano cultu solum, L.: (opoidum) vacuum ab defensoribus, Cs.: alqm pudicum servare ab omni facto, etc., II.; with substt.: impunitas ab iudicio: ab armis quies dabatur, L.; or verbs: haec a custodiis loca vacabant, Cs.— 2. To denote the agent, by: qui (Mars) saepe spoliantem iam evertit et perculit ab abiecto, by the agency of: Laudari me abs te, a laudato viro: si quid ei a Caesare gravius accidisset, at Caesar's hands, Cs.: vetus umor ab igne percaluit solis, under, O.: a populo P. imperia perferre, Cs.: equo lassus ab indomito, H.: volgo occidebantur: per quos et a quibus? by whose hands and upon whose orders? factus ab arte decor, artificial, O.: destitutus ab spe, L.; (for the sake of the metre): correptus ab ignibus, O.; (poet. with abl. of means or instr.): intumuit venter ab undā, O.—Ab with abl. of agent for the dat., to avoid ambiguity, or for emphasis: quibus (civibus) est a vobis consulendum: te a me nostrae consuetudinis monendum esse puto.— 3. To denote source, origin, extraction, from, of: Turnus ab Ariciā, L.: si ego me a M. Tullio esse dicerem: oriundi ab Sabinis, L.: dulces a fontibus undae, V.—With verbs of expecting, fearing, hoping (cf. a parte), from, on the part of: a quo quidem genere, iudices, ego numquam timui: nec ab Romanis vobis ulla est spes, you can expect nothing from the Romans, L.; (ellipt.): haec a servorum bello pericula, threatened by: quem metus a praetore Romano stimulabat, fear of what the praetor might do, L.—With verbs of paying, etc., solvere, persolvere, dare (pecuniam) ab aliquo, to pay through, by a draft on, etc.: se praetor dedit, a quaestore numeravit, quaestor a mensā publicā, by an order on the quaestor: ei legat pecuniam a filio, to be paid by his son: scribe decem (milia) a Nerio, pay by a draft on Nerius, H.; cognoscere ab aliquā re, to know or learn by means of something (but ab aliquo, from some one): id se a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse, Cs.; in giving an etymology: id ab re... interregnum appellatum, L.—Rarely with verbs of beginning and repeating: coepere a fame mala, L.: a se suisque orsus, Ta.— 4. With verbs of freeing from, defending, protecting, from, against: ut a proeliis quietem habuerant, L.: provincia a calamitate est defendenda: sustinere se a lapsu, L.— 5. With verbs and adjectives, to define the respect in which, in relation to, with regard to, in respect to, on the part of: orba ab optimatibus contio: mons vastus ab naturā et humano cultu, S.: ne ab re sint omissiores, too neglectful of money or property, T.: posse a facundiā, in the matter of eloquence, T.; cf. with laborare, for the simple abl, in, for want of: laborare ab re frumentariā, Cs.— 6. In stating a motive, from, out of, on account of, in consequence of: patres ab honore appellati, L.: inops tum urbs ab longinquā obsidione, L.— 7. Indicating a part of the whole, of, out of: scuto ab novissimis uni militi detracto, Cs.: a quibus (captivis) ad Senatum missus (Regulus).— 8. Marking that to which anything belongs: qui sunt ab eā disciplinā: nostri illi a Platone et Aristotele aiunt.— 9. Of a side or party: vide ne hoc totum sit a me, makes for my view: vir ab innocentiā clementissimus, in favor of.—10. In late prose, of an office: ab epistulis, a secretary, Ta. Note. Ab is not repeated with a following pron interrog. or relat.: Arsinoën, Stratum, Naupactum... fateris ab hostibus esse captas. Quibus autem hostibus? Nempe iis, quos, etc. It is often separated from the word which it governs: a nullius umquam me tempore aut commodo: a minus bono, S.: a satis miti principio, L.—The poets join a and que, making āque; but in good prose que is annexed to the following abl. (a meque, abs teque, etc.): aque Chao, V.: aque mero, O.—In composition, ab- stands before vowels, and h, b, d, i consonant, l, n, r, s; abs- before c, q, t; b is dropped, leaving as- before p; ā- is found in āfuī, āfore ( inf fut. of absum); and au- in auferō, aufugiō.* * *IAh!; (distress/regret/pity, appeal/entreaty, surprise/joy, objection/contempt)IIby (agent), from (departure, cause, remote origin/time); after (reference)IIIante, abb. a.in calendar expression a. d. = ante diem -- before the day
-
11 poder
m.1 power (mando, competencia).estar en/hacerse con el poder to be in/to seize powerpoder adquisitivo purchasing powerpoder calorífico calorific valuepoder de convicción persuasive powerstener poder de convocatoria to be a crowd-pullerel poder ejecutivo/legislativo/judicial the executive/legislature/judiciary (personas)poderes fácticos the church, military and presspoderes públicos public authoritiesEl poder corrompe a los indecisos Power corrupts the undecided.2 power, authorization.dar poderes a alguien para que haga algo to authorize somebody to do somethingpor poderes by proxypoder notarial power of attorney3 faculty.4 proxy, letter of delegation, power of attorney, letter of attorney.Ella se casó usando un poder She married using a proxy.v.1 can, to be able to.no puedo decírtelo I can't tell you, I'm unable to tell you2 can, may (tener permiso).no puedo salir por la noche I'm not allowed to o I can't go out at night¿puedo fumar aquí? may I smoke here?¿se puede? may I come in?3 can (ser capaz moralmente).no podemos portarnos así con él we can't treat him like that4 may, can (tener posibilidad, ser posible).puede estallar la guerra war could o may break outpodías haber ido en tren you could have gone by train¡podría habernos invitado! she could o might have invited us! (expresa enfado)puede que llueva it may o might rain¿vendrás mañana? — puede will you come tomorrow? — I may dopuede ser perhaps, maybe5 to be stronger than.tú eres más alto, pero yo te puedo you may be taller than me, but I could still beat you up6 to can, to may, to be able to, to be apt to.Ella puede correr She is able to run.7 to might, to stand to.Ella podría surgir She might rise above.8 to be capable.* * *Present IndicativePast IndicativeFuture IndicativeConditionalPresent SubjunctiveImperfect SubjunctiveFuture SubjunctiveImperative* * *1. verb1) can2) to be able3) may2. noun m.1) power2) control3) possession4) strength, force* * *1. VERBO AUXILIAR1) (=tener la posibilidad o capacidad de)puedo hacerlo solo — I can do it on my own o by myself
¿se puede llamar por teléfono desde aquí? — can you phone from here?
no puede venir — he can't o cannot come
no ha podido venir — he couldn't come, he was unable to come
2) (=tener permiso para)puedes irte — you can o may go
¿puedo usar tu teléfono? — can o may I use your phone?
¿puedo abrir la ventana? — can o may I open the window?
aquí no se puede fumar — you aren't allowed to smoke here, you can't smoke here
3) [en peticiones]¿puedes/puede darme un vaso de agua? — can I/may I have a glass of water please?
¿me puede usted decir cuándo sale el autobús? — can o could you tell me when the bus leaves?
4) [indicando eventualidad]puede o podría estar en cualquier sitio — it could o might be anywhere
¡cuidado, te puedes hacer daño! — careful, you could o might hurt yourself!
podías haberte roto una pierna — you could o might have broken your leg
5) [indicando obligación moral]¡no pueden tratarnos así! — they can't treat us like this!
6) [en cálculos, aproximaciones]¿qué edad puede tener? — I wonder what age he is?, how old do you reckon he is?
7) [en sugerencias]8) [en reproches]¡podías habérmelo dicho! — you could o might have told me!
habría podido ser más amable — she could o might have been a bit nicer
¡al menos podrías disculparte! — you could at least say sorry!
2. VERBO INTRANSITIVO1) (=tener la posibilidad o capacidad)¡no puedo más! — (=estoy agotado) I can't go on!; (=estoy desesperado) I can't cope any more!; (=he comido mucho) I can't eat another thing!
2) (=tener permiso)¿se puede? — may I come in?
¿puedo? — may I?
3) (=tener dominio, influencia)los que pueden — those who can, those who are able
el dinero puede mucho — money can do almost anything, money talks
poder conpoder a algn: yo le puedo — I'm a match for him; [entre niños] I could have him *
¿puedes con la maleta? — can you manage the suitcase?
no puedo con él — (=no puedo controlarle) I can't handle him; (=pesa mucho) he's too heavy for me
4) [en locuciones]•
a más no poder, es tonto a más no poder — he's as stupid as they come•
no poder por menos que, no pude por menos que decirle lo que pensaba de él — I just had to tell him what I thought of himsu actitud me pudo — his attitude annoyed me o got on my nerves
3.VERBO IMPERSONALpuede (ser) (=es posible) maybe, it may be so, perhapspuede (ser) que ({+ subjun}9})¡no puede ser! — that can't be!, that's impossible!
puede (ser) que esté en la biblioteca — he could o may be in the library, perhaps he's in the library
puede (ser) que tenga uno ya — he may o might have one already
puede (ser) que no venga — he may o might not come
puede (ser) que tenga razón — she may o could be right
4. SUSTANTIVO MASCULINO1) (=capacidad, facultad) powerpoder de convocatoria, tienen un gran poder de convocatoria — they really pull in the crowds, they're real crowd-pullers *
2) (=autoridad, influencia) powerejercen un poder enorme sobre la juventud — they have a lot of power o influence over young people
no tienen poder para oponerse a estas medidas — they are not powerful enough to oppose these measures
3) (Pol)¡el pueblo al poder! — power to the people!
¡Herrera al poder! — Herrera for leader!
•
bajo el poder de algn, estar en el poder, ocupar el poder — to be in power•
el cuarto poder — the fourth estate4) (=fuerza, eficacia)este medicamento no tiene poder contra la tuberculosis — this drug is ineffective o isn't effective against tuberculosis
5) (=potestad)pl poderes powersles dieron amplios poderes para dirigir la empresa — they were given wide-ranging powers to run the company
tiene plenos poderes para intervenir en el asunto — he has full authority to intervene in the matter
6) (Jur)7) (=posesión) possessionesa información está u obra en poder de la juez — that information is in the hands of the judge, that information is in the judge's possession
•
pasar a poder de algn — to pass to sb, pass into sb's possession8) (Fís, Mec) power9) LAm (=persona) drug pusher* * *Iverbo auxiliar¿cuándo podrá darme una respuesta? — when will you be able to o when can you give me an answer?
no pudo asistir a la reunión — he was unable to o he couldn't attend the meeting
¿pudiste hacerlo sola? — were you able to do it on your own?
¿puedo servirme otro? — can o may I have another one?
¿le puedo hacer una sugerencia? — may I make a suggestion?
¿podría irme un poco más temprano hoy? — could I leave a little earlier today?
¿se puede? - adelante! — may I? - come in
3) ( expresando derecho moral)4)a) (en quejas, reproches)¿cómo pudiste hacer una cosa así? — how could you do such a thing?
podías or podrías haberme avisado — you could o might have warned me!
b) ( en sugerencias)c) ( solicitando un favor)¿puedes bajar un momento? — can you come down for a moment?
¿podrías hacerme un favor? — could you do me a favor?
poder con algo/alguien: ¿puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?; no puedo con esta maleta I can't manage this suitcase; no pudo con el alemán y lo dejó he couldn't get to grips with German and he gave up; con este niño no hay quien pueda! this child is just impossible!; podérsela con algo — (Chi fam) to cope with something
6) (en locs)a más no poder: comió a más no poder he ate until he was fit to burst; corrimos a más no poder we ran as fast as we could; es feo a más no poder he's as ugly as they come; no poder más: estoy que no puedo más ( cansado) I'm exhausted; ( lleno) I can't eat anything else; ya no puedo más con este niño I'm at the end of my tether with this child; ya no puedo más, me está desquiciando I can't go on like this, it's driving me mad; no poder (por) menos que: no pude menos que sentirme halagado I couldn't help feeling flattered; no pudo menos que reconocer — she had no alternative but to admit
7) (fam) (+ me, te, le etc)a) ( ganar)él es más alto, pero tú le puedes — he's taller than you but you can beat him
b) (Méx) ( doler)8) (con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad)te podrías or podías haber matado — you could have killed yourself!
9) (en 3a pers)no puede ser que no lo sepa — he must know
no puede ser que ya haya terminado — he can't have finished already
si puede ser or (Esp) a poder ser — if possible
puede (ser) que tengas razón — you may o could be right
II- puede que sí, puede que no — maybe, maybe not
1)a) (control, influencia) powertiene mucho poder en el pueblo — he has a great deal of power o influence in the village
estamos/nos tiene en su poder — we are/she has us in her power
caer en poder de alguien — ciudad/país to fall to somebody
b) (Pol)tomar el poder — to take o seize power
detenta el poder desde hace 20 años — (frml) he has held power for 20 years
2) ( posesión)la carta está en poder de... — the letter is in the hands of...
obra en su poder la copia del acta — (frml) you have in your possession a copy of the minutes
3)a) (derecho, atribución)tener amplios/plenos poderes para hacer algo — to have wide-ranging powers/full authority to do something
b) (Der) ( documento) letter of authorization; ( hecho ante notario) power of attorneycasarse por poder (AmL) or (Esp) por poderes — to get married by proxy
4)a) (capacidad, facultad) powerb) (de motor, aparato) power•* * *Iverbo auxiliar¿cuándo podrá darme una respuesta? — when will you be able to o when can you give me an answer?
no pudo asistir a la reunión — he was unable to o he couldn't attend the meeting
¿pudiste hacerlo sola? — were you able to do it on your own?
¿puedo servirme otro? — can o may I have another one?
¿le puedo hacer una sugerencia? — may I make a suggestion?
¿podría irme un poco más temprano hoy? — could I leave a little earlier today?
¿se puede? - adelante! — may I? - come in
3) ( expresando derecho moral)4)a) (en quejas, reproches)¿cómo pudiste hacer una cosa así? — how could you do such a thing?
podías or podrías haberme avisado — you could o might have warned me!
b) ( en sugerencias)c) ( solicitando un favor)¿puedes bajar un momento? — can you come down for a moment?
¿podrías hacerme un favor? — could you do me a favor?
poder con algo/alguien: ¿puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?; no puedo con esta maleta I can't manage this suitcase; no pudo con el alemán y lo dejó he couldn't get to grips with German and he gave up; con este niño no hay quien pueda! this child is just impossible!; podérsela con algo — (Chi fam) to cope with something
6) (en locs)a más no poder: comió a más no poder he ate until he was fit to burst; corrimos a más no poder we ran as fast as we could; es feo a más no poder he's as ugly as they come; no poder más: estoy que no puedo más ( cansado) I'm exhausted; ( lleno) I can't eat anything else; ya no puedo más con este niño I'm at the end of my tether with this child; ya no puedo más, me está desquiciando I can't go on like this, it's driving me mad; no poder (por) menos que: no pude menos que sentirme halagado I couldn't help feeling flattered; no pudo menos que reconocer — she had no alternative but to admit
7) (fam) (+ me, te, le etc)a) ( ganar)él es más alto, pero tú le puedes — he's taller than you but you can beat him
b) (Méx) ( doler)8) (con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad)te podrías or podías haber matado — you could have killed yourself!
9) (en 3a pers)no puede ser que no lo sepa — he must know
no puede ser que ya haya terminado — he can't have finished already
si puede ser or (Esp) a poder ser — if possible
puede (ser) que tengas razón — you may o could be right
II- puede que sí, puede que no — maybe, maybe not
1)a) (control, influencia) powertiene mucho poder en el pueblo — he has a great deal of power o influence in the village
estamos/nos tiene en su poder — we are/she has us in her power
caer en poder de alguien — ciudad/país to fall to somebody
b) (Pol)tomar el poder — to take o seize power
detenta el poder desde hace 20 años — (frml) he has held power for 20 years
2) ( posesión)la carta está en poder de... — the letter is in the hands of...
obra en su poder la copia del acta — (frml) you have in your possession a copy of the minutes
3)a) (derecho, atribución)tener amplios/plenos poderes para hacer algo — to have wide-ranging powers/full authority to do something
b) (Der) ( documento) letter of authorization; ( hecho ante notario) power of attorneycasarse por poder (AmL) or (Esp) por poderes — to get married by proxy
4)a) (capacidad, facultad) powerb) (de motor, aparato) power•* * *poder11 = force, strength, power, leverage, authority, clout, might, muscle power, power of attorney, sway.Ex: Her reason admitted the force of his arguments, but her instinct opposed it.
Ex: The strength of the acetone rinsing on the strength of the paper is investigated, and its efficiency in removing NM2P is also examined using gas liquid chromatography.Ex: She added that she felt sorry for the assistant because he had so little power.Ex: At certain times, dubious interpretations of the rules have even been used as leverage in gaining ground on matters of dispute between Community partners.Ex: One of the great virtues of networking is that it democratizes access to information and access to authority.Ex: IT executives would like to see their role in the organization elevated, giving them more ' clout', stature and visibility.Ex: Gradually many of these conquerors came to realize that, although military might was necessary to gain control over an area, sheer force of arms was not sufficient to govern effectively.Ex: Their development, particularly for replacing human muscle power, has been in parallel with that of information technology, but largely independent of it.Ex: A power of attorney is a legal instrument that is used to delegate legal authority to another.Ex: During this period Africa was influenced by external forces as the Islamic states of the north extended their sway south.* abusar del poder = lord over, lord it over.* abuso de poder = abuse of power.* altas esferas del poder, las = echelons of power, the.* ansioso de poder = power-hungry.* asumir poder = assume + power.* ceder las riendas del poder = hand over + the reins of power.* círculo de poder = circle of power.* con ansias de poder = power-hungry.* conceder poderes = give + powers.* con hambre de poder = power-hungry.* con poder = powerful.* con sed de poder = power-hungry.* control del poder = hold on power.* dar poderes = give + powers.* dejar sin poder = disempower.* división de poderes = division of powers.* ejercer poder = wield + power, exercise + power.* en el poder = in office.* equilibrio de poder = balance of power.* estructura de poder = power structure.* frecuentar los pasillos del poder = stalk + the corridors of power.* gente de poder = wielders of power, powerful people.* gobierno en el poder = ruling government.* grupo de poder = power group.* hambriento de poder = power-hungry.* igualdad de poder = parity of power.* inversión de poderes = power reversal.* jerarquía de poder = scalar chain.* llevar al poder = bring + Nombre + to power.* los poderes fáticos = the powers-that-be.* los que detentan el poder = the powers-that-be.* lucha de poderes = power struggle.* lucha por el poder = power struggle.* luchar de poderes = battle of wills.* partido en el poder, el = ruling party, the.* pasar las riendas del poder a = hand + the reins over to.* pasillos del poder, los = corridors of power, the.* perder poder = lose + power.* pérdida de poder = disempowerment.* poder adquisitivo = spending power, purchasing power, buying power.* poder colectivo = collective power.* poder curativo = healing power.* poder de atracción = drawing power.* poder de curación = healing power.* poder de discriminación = discretion.* poder de enganche = holding power.* poder del estado = state power.* poder de negociación = bargaining power.* poder de representación = power of representation.* poder de retención = holding power.* poder divino = divine power.* poder económico = economic leverage.* poder ejecutivo = chief executive, executive arm, executive power.* poder ejecutivo, el = Executive, the.* poder estatal = state power.* poder imperial = imperial power.* poder judicial = judicial arm, judicial system.* poder judicial, el = judiciary, the.* poder legal = statutory power.* poder legislativo = legislative power, legislative arm.* poder mágico = magical power, magic power.* poder notarial = power of attorney.* poder político = political power.* poder presidencial = presidential power.* poder público = public power, public authority.* poder remunerativo = earning power, earning capacity.* poder sobrenatural = supernatural power.* política del poder = power politics.* por poderes = by proxy.* posición de poder = position power.* quitar el poder = disempower.* relación de poder = power relationship.* relaciones de poder = power relations.* sediento de poder = power-hungry.* subida al poder = seizure of power.* subir al poder = rise to + power.* tener el poder = be the boss, call + the shots, call + the tune, rule + the roost.* tener el poder de = have + the power to.* tener las riendas del poder = hold + the reins of power.* tomar el poder = take + power.* tomar las riendas del poder = take + the reins of power.poder22 = be able to, be capable of, can, have + the opportunity, may, qualify for, manage to.Ex: Thus the electronic journal (e-journal) is a concept where scientists are able to input ideas and text to a computer data base for their colleagues to view, and similarly to view the work of others.
Ex: Main classes are thus only capable of precise definition in the contexts of particular classification schemes.Ex: When used by skilled abstractors this mixture of styles can achieve the maximum transmission of information, within a minimum length.Ex: Every librarian, regardless of his government's policy, has the opportunity, if he has the courage, to open the avenues of books and ideas a little wider.Ex: My second point may be a slightly tangential, but I hope it is a concrete reaction to the general tenor of Mr. Lubetzky's remarks and the general subject posed.Ex: FIAC has drawn up a list of criteria to determine whether an advice centre qualifies for membership of the Federation.Ex: Tom Hernandez tried not to show how sad he felt about his friends' leaving, and managed to keep up a cheerful facade until the party broke up.* Algo por lo que se puede cobrar = billable.* al que no se puede dejar de faltar = unmissable.* como mejor + poder = as best + Pronombre + can.* cuando antes pueda = at + Posesivo + earliest convenience.* de modo que + poder + oír = within earshot of.* en el que se puede buscar = searchable.* estar tan bueno que no se puede dejar de comer = moreish, moreish.* hacerlo lo mejor que Uno pueda = do + Posesivo + utmost.* hacer lo mejor que Uno pueda = put + Posesivo + best into.* hacer lo mejor que Uno puede = try + Posesivo + heart out.* hacer todo lo que Uno pueda = do + Posesivo + best, do + the best + Nombre + may, do + the best + Nombre + can.* hacer todo lo que Uno pueda (dado) = do + the best possible (with).* lo suficientemente lejos como para no poder oír = out of earshot.* muy bien + podría + Verbo = might + well + Verbo.* muy bien + puede + Verbo = may well + Verbo.* nada puede estar más apartado de la realidad = nothing can be further from the truth.* noche sin poder dormir = sleepless night.* no poder = be unable to, cannot, can't [cannot].* no poder aguantar a Alguien = have + it in for + Nombre.* no poder conciliar el sueño = have + trouble sleeping.* no poder dejar de mencionar = cannot but notice.* no poder dejar de recalcar la importancia de Algo = the importance of + Nombre + cannot be stressed too strongly, cannot + give + too much emphasis + to the importance of.* no poder dormir = sleeplessness.* no poder estarse quieto = have + the fidgets, fidget.* no poder evitar + Infinitivo = cannot help + Gerundio, cannot help but + Verbo.* no poder evitar mencionar = cannot but notice.* no poder hacer más que = do + little more than.* no poder permitirse = ill afford.* no poder permitirse el lujo de = ill afford.* no poder quitarse Algo de la cabeza = can't get it out of my mind.* no poderse buscar = be unsearchable.* no poderse negar que = there + be + no denying that.* no poder ver a Alguien = have + it in for + Nombre.* no poder ver Algo o Alguien = can't stand + sight.* no pude evitar notar que = couldn't help but notice (that).* no puedo aguantarlo = can't take it.* no puedo comprender = I can't get over.* No se le puede pedir peras al olmo = You can't make a silk purse out of a sow's ear.* no se puede dejar de recalcar el + Nombre + de = the + Nombre + of + Nombre + cannot be overemphasised.* no se puede dejar de recalcar el + Nombre + of = the + Nombre + of + Nombre + cannot be overstated.* no se puede dejar de recalcar la importancia de Algo = the importance of + Nombre + cannot be overemphasised, the importance of + Nombre + cannot be overstated.* personas que no pueden salir de casa = homebound, the.* poder contar con = be there for + Pronombre, be there for + Pronombre.* poder + Infinitivo = succeed in + Gerundio.* poderse afirmar que = it + be + safe to say that.* poderse contestar = be answerable.* poderse integrar en = be integrable in.* poderse localizar = be locatable.* poder utilizarse = be usable.* por el que se puede cobrar = chargeable.* puede muy bien ser = could well be.* puede muy bien ser que = it may well be that.* puede que = maybe.* puede que al final sea para bien = be a blessing in disguise.* ¿Puede repetir? = I beg your pardon?, I beg your pardon?.* que no se le puede dar un nombre = unnameable.* que no se puede conseguir = unobtainable.* que no se puede entregar = undeliverable.* que no se puede hacer cumplir = unenforceable.* que no se puede identificar con un término = unnameable.* que no se puede uno perder = unmissable.* que puede causar detención = arrestable.* que puede demostrarse = demonstrably.* que puede salir en préstamo = loanable.* que puede ser apilado = stacking.* que puede ser usado a través de la web = web-compliant.* querer es poder = where there's a will there's a way.* que se le puede dar un nombre = nameable.* que se puede arreglar = fixable.* que se puede buscar = searchable.* que se puede cambiar de tamaño = resizeable [re-sizeable].* que se puede escuchar = playable.* que se puede hacer cumplir = enforceable.* que se puede identificar con un término = nameable.* que se puede imprimir = printable.* que se puede quitar = detachable.* que se puede separar = detachable.* que se puede visualizar = viewable.* sálvese el que pueda = free-for-all.* sálvese quien pueda = the devil take the hindmost, every man for himself, let battle commence.* se puede = is to be.* siempre que uno puede dedicarle el tiempo = in + Posesivo + own time.* sin poder contenerse = helplessly.* sin poder dormir = sleepless.* sin poder extinguirlo = inextinguishably.* sin poder hacer nada = helplessly.* tan sorprendente como pueda parecer = as amazing as it seems.* todavía + poderse + escuchar los ecos de = echo + still resound from.* * *A tener la capacidad deB expresando idea de permisoC expresando un derecho moralD1 en quejas, reproches2 en sugerencias3 solicitando un favorA1 poder con algo/alguien2 el dinero lo puede todoB en locucionesC1 vencer, ganar2 dolerA con idea de eventualidadB en tercera personaA(tener la capacidad o posibilidad de): ven en cuanto puedas come as soon as you canno puedo pagar tanto I can't pay that much¿cómo que no puedes? what do you mean, you can't do it ( o you can't come etc)?no podía dejar de reír I couldn't stop laughingno va a poder venir he won't be able to come¿cuándo podrá darme una respuesta definitiva? when will you be able to o when can you give me a firm answer?no pude convencerla I couldn't persuade herno pudo asistir a la reunión he was unable to o he couldn't attend the meeting¿pudiste hacerlo sola? did you manage to do it o were you able to do it on your own?hicimos todo lo que pudimos por ayudarlos we did everything in our power o everything we could to help themno se puede valer por sí mismo he can't manage by himselfno habría podido hacerlo sin tu ayuda I wouldn't have been able to do it o I couldn't have done it without your helpno debe (de) haber podido encontrarlo she obviously couldn't find it o can't have found it¡este niño no se puede estar quieto ni un minuto! this child just won't o can't keep still for a minute!con aquel ruido no se podía trabajar it was impossible to work o you couldn't work with that noise going on¿sabes que se han prometido? — ¡no te (lo) puedo creer! do you know they're engaged? — you're joking! o I don't believe it!B(expresando idea de permiso): ¿puedo servirme otro? can o may I have another one?ya pueden volver la hoja you may turn the page over now¿me puedo ir? — ¡no señor! can o may I go? — no, you cannot o may not!¿sales a jugar? — no puedo, estoy castigada are you coming out to play? — I can't, I'm being kept in¿puedo pasar? may I come in?¿le puedo hacer una sugerencia? may I make a suggestion?¿podría irme un poco más temprano hoy? could I leave a little earlier today?por mí, puedes hacer lo que quieras as far as I'm concerned, you can do whatever you likeno puede comer sal he isn't allowed to eat salt¿quién te lo dijo, si se puede saber? who told you, may I ask?¿se puede? — ¡adelante! may I? — come inaquí no se puede fumar smoking is not allowed here, you can't smoke hereC(expresando un derecho moral): no podemos hacerle eso we can't do that to herdespués de lo que has trabajado, bien puedes tomarte un descanso you're entitled to o you deserve a rest after all the work you've donees lo menos que puedes hacer it's the least you can doD1(en quejas, reproches): ¿cómo pudiste hacer una cosa así? how could you do such a thing?¿cómo puedes ser tan ingrato? how can you be so ungrateful?podías or podrías haberme avisado you could o might have warned me!2(en sugerencias): podrías or podías pedírselo tú, a ti siempre te hace caso why don't you ask him? he always listens to youya te puedes ir haciendo a la idea you'd better start getting used to the idea3(solicitando un favor): ¿puedes bajar un momento? can you come down for a moment?¿podrías hacerme un favor? could you do me a favor?¿no puedes irte a jugar a otra parte? can't you go and play somewhere else?A1 poder CON algo/algn:¿tú puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?no puedo con esta maleta I can't manage this suitcaseyo no puedo solo con la casa, los niños y la tienda I can't do the housework, look after the children and run the store all on my own, I can't cope with the house, the children and the store all on my ownno pudo con el alemán y lo dejó he couldn't get o come to grips with German and he gave up¡con este niño no hay quien pueda! this child is just impossible!no se la puede con el trabajo he can't cope with the job o manage the job2el dinero lo puede todo money talks, you can do anything if you have moneyB ( en locuciones):a más no poder: comió a más no poder he ate until he was fit to burstgana dinero a más no poder she's making pots of money ( colloq), she's making money hand over fistes feo a más no poder he's as ugly as they comecorrimos a más no poder we ran for all we were worth o as fast as we couldno poder más: estoy que no puedo más (de cansancio) I'm exhausteda mí no me des postre que ya no puedo más don't serve me any dessert, I can't eat anything elseya no puedo más con este niño I'm at the end of my tether with this childno podía más, y ese estúpido que no salía del cuarto de baño I was desperate o I was bursting to go and that idiot wouldn't come out of the bathroom ( colloq)ya no puedo más, me está desquiciando I can't go on like this, it's driving me madno poder (por) menos que: uno no puede menos que sentirse halagado one can't help feeling flatteredno puedo menos que expresar mi profunda decepción I feel I must say how deeply disappointed I amno pudo menos que reconocer que teníamos razón she had no alternative but to admit that we were rightC1 ( fam)(vencer, ganar): él es más alto pero tú le puedes he's taller than you but you can beat himtu papá no le puede al mío your dad's not as strong as minea gracioso no hay quien le pueda as a comic, there's no-one to beat him o he's unbeatable2( Méx fam) (doler): tu desprecio le puede mucho she's very hurt by your disdainful attitude, your disdainful attitude hurts her deeplynos pudo mucho la muerte de Julio we were greatly saddened o terribly upset by Julio's deathA(con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad): puede aparecer en cualquier momento he may turn up at any momentde él se puede esperar cualquier cosa anything's possible with himno sé dónde lo puedo haber puesto I don't know where I can have put itno hagas nada que pueda resultar sospechoso don't do anything that might look suspiciouspuede haber venido mientras no estábamos he may have come while we were outhace horas que están reunidos ¿de qué pueden estar hablando? they've been in that meeting for hours, what can they be talking about?te podrías or podías haber matado you could have killed yourself!un error así puede costar millones a mistake like that could cost millionsno podía haber estado más amable she couldn't have been kinderllaman a la puerta — ¿quién podrá ser a estas horas? there's someone at the door — who can o could it be at this time?podría volver a ocurrir it could happen againPilar no pudo haber sido it couldn't have been PilarB ( en tercera persona):¿nos habrá mentido? — no sé, puede ser do you think he lied to us? — I don't know, he may have done o it's possibleno puede ser que no lo sepa he must knowno puede ser que ya haya terminado he can't have finished alreadysi puede ser or ( Esp) a poder ser preferiría la cuarta fila if possible, I'd prefer row fourme habría gustado verlo pero no pudo ser I would have liked to see him but it wasn't possible o it wasn't to bepuede (ser) que tengas razón you may o could be rightpuede (ser) que no nos haya visto he may not have seen us¿vas a votar para ella? — puede que sí or puede are you going to vote for her? — maybe o I may¿lo vas a aceptar? — puede que sí, puede que no are you going to accept it? — maybe, maybe notA1 (control, influencia) powerel poder de la prensa the power of the presstiene mucho poder en el pueblo he has a great deal of power o influence o he is a very powerful man in the villagela Familia Real no tiene ningún poder the Royal Family has no powerConstantinopla cayó en poder de los turcos Constantinople fell to the Turksestamos/nos tiene en su poder we are/she has us in her power2 ( Pol):el poder powerestar en el poder to be in powertomar el poder to take o seize powerasumir el poder to assume powerdetenta el poder desde hace 20 años ( frml); he has held power for 20 yearslleva cuatro años en el poder he has been in power for four yearstoda la vida buscó el poder y la gloria all her life she sought power and fameel poder en la sombra the power behind the throneel poder corrompe power corruptsB(posesión): la carta está en poder de las autoridades the letter is in the hands of the authoritieshay que evitar que llegue a su poder we have to stop it falling into his handsobra en su poder la copia del acta ( frml); you have in your possession a copy of the minutesla solicitud ya pasó a poder de la oficina central the application has already been passed to our head officeC1(derecho, atribución): tiene amplios/plenos poderes para investigar el asunto he has wide-ranging powers/full authority to investigate the matterla entrega or transmisión de poderes the handing over o transmission of powerlos poderes de la junta son ilimitados the junta has unlimited powerslos poderes que le han sido conferidos the powers which have been vested in himla separación de poderes entre la Iglesia y el Estado the division o separation of power between the Church and the StateD1 (capacidad, facultad) powersu poder de convicción or de persuasión her power of persuasionel poder del amor/de la sugestión the power of love/of suggestiontiene poderes extrasensoriales he has extrasensory powers2 (de un motor, aparato) powerCompuestos:masculine absolute powermasculine (de una divisa, un sueldo) purchasing power, buying power; (de una persona, un grupo) purchasing power, spending powermasculine divine powerel poder ejecutivo the executivempl power of attorneympl:los poderes públicos the authoritiesel poder judicial the judiciaryel poder legislativo the legislature* * *
poder 1 ( conjugate poder) v aux
1 ( tener la capacidad o posibilidad de):
no puedo pagar tanto I can't pay that much;
no podía dormir I couldn't sleep;
no va a poder venir he won't be able to come;
no pudo asistir he was unable to o he couldn't attend;
¿pudiste hacerlo sola? were you able to do it on your own?
2a) ( expresando idea de permiso):◊ ¿puedo servirme otro? can o may I have another one?;
¿podría irme más temprano hoy? could I leave earlier today?;
puedes hacer lo que quieras you can do whatever you like;
no puede comer sal he isn't allowed to eat salt;
¿se puede? — ¡adelante! may I? — come in;
aquí no se puede fumar smoking is not allowed hereb) ( solicitando un favor):◊ ¿puedes bajar un momento? can you come down for a moment?;
¿podrías hacerme un favor? could you do me a favor?
3 ( expresando derecho moral):
4 (en quejas, reproches): podías or podrías haberme avisado you could o might have warned me!
( con idea de esfuerzo)
1 poder con algo/algn:◊ ¿puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?;
no puedo con este niño I can't cope with this child;
estoy que no puedo más ( cansado) I'm exhausted;
( lleno) I can't eat anything else;
2 (con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad): te podrías or podías haber matado you could have killed yourself!;
podría volver a ocurrir it could happen again;
no pudo ser it wasn't possible;
puede (ser) que tengas razón you may o could be right;
puede que sí, puede que no maybe, maybe not
3 (Méx) ( doler):
poder 2 sustantivo masculino
1
estamos en su poder we are in her powerb) (Pol)
estar en el poder to be in power;
tomar el poder to take o seize power
2 ( posesión):◊ la carta está en poder de … the letter is in the hands of …
3
( hecho ante notario) power of attorney;
casarse por poder (AmL) or (Esp) por poderes to get married by proxy
4
poder adquisitivo purchasing power
poder 1 sustantivo masculino power
Jur por poderes, by proxy
Econ poder adquisitivo, purchasing power
poder 2
I verbo transitivo
1 (tener capacidad) to be able to, can: no puedo evitarlo, I can't help it
podías habernos avisado, you could/ might have warned us
2 (tener derecho o autorización) may, might, can
¿puedo repetir?, may I have a second helping?
no puede tomar carne de cerdo, he can't eat pork
las mujeres ya pueden votar, women can already vote
3 (uso impers) may, might: puede que la vea luego, I might see her later
puede que sí, puede que no, maybe, maybe not
II verbo intransitivo
1 to cope [con, with]: no puedo con todo, I can't cope
2 (vencer, tener más fuerza) to be stronger than
En el presente, can y to be able to son sinónimos. Sin embargo, en el pasado could significa que podías hacer algo, mientras que was o were able to significa que, además de poder hacerlo, lo hiciste: I could tell him the truth. Podía decirle la verdad (no sabemos si lo hice). I was able to tell him the truth. Fui capaz de decirle la verdad (lo hice). En el futuro solo podemos emplear to be able to: I will be able to do it tomorrow. Podré hacerlo mañana.
Para expresar posibilidad puedes usar may, could o might. La diferencia consiste en el grado de probabilidad que sugieren. Recuerda que may se refiere a hechos más probables que might o could: Puede que llueva mañana. It may rain tomorrow (crees que es posible). It might/ could rain tomorrow (crees que la posibilidad es más remota).
' poder' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
absoluta
- absoluto
- abusar
- abuso
- adquisitiva
- adquisitivo
- ámbito
- caber
- CGPJ
- concentrar
- continuismo
- desgaste
- desperdicio
- destronar
- desvelarse
- dominio
- entregar
- erótica
- excedente
- garra
- grabar
- grandeza
- idea
- informal
- judicial
- legislativa
- legislativo
- manifestarse
- mano
- obrar
- parcela
- remediar
- respirar
- sátrapa
- sed
- seducción
- someterse
- sugestión
- usurpar
- ver
- acumular
- anhelar
- ansia
- ansiar
- atribuir
- autoridad
- ávido
- ceder
- clavar
- confiar
English:
able
- abuse
- afford
- anything
- assume
- assumption
- can
- conform
- cope
- encroach
- fold
- form
- foursome
- get
- glad
- greed
- greediness
- greedy
- handle
- hungry
- lust
- make
- manage
- may
- might
- office
- out
- power
- power of attorney
- proxy
- purchasing power
- seize
- seizure
- spending power
- stick
- stranglehold
- take aside
- takeover
- unable
- use
- utmost
- whichever
- zenith
- could
- executive
- height
- helplessly
- judiciary
- lie
- peace
* * *poder1 nm1. [mando, autoridad] power;la gente con más poder en la organización the most powerful people in the organization;estar en el poder to be in power;perder el poder to lose power;el poder corrompe power corrupts;la separación de poderes the separation of powers;de poder a poder: un enfrentamiento de poder a poder a heavyweight contest;el partido se disputó de poder a poder it was a close contest between two excellent sidespoder absoluto absolute power;el poder ejecutivo [el gobierno] the executive;los poderes fácticos the centres of power in society;el poder judicial [los jueces] the judiciary;el poder legislativo [las cortes] the legislature;poderes públicos (public) authoritiesobra en su poder un documento comprometedor she has in her possession a compromising document;tienen en su poder a varios rehenes they have taken a number of hostages;el pueblo cayó en poder del enemigo the town fell to the enemy;la casa pasó a poder del banco ownership of the house was transferred to the bank3. [capacidad] power;un producto con gran poder de limpieza a very powerful cleaning product;tener poderes (paranormales) to be psychic, to have psychic powerspoder adquisitivo [de salario] purchasing o buying power; [de persona] disposable income;poder calorífico calorific value;poder de convicción persuasive powers;poder de convocatoria: [m5] tener poder de convocatoria to be a crowd-puller;Mil poder de disuasión deterrent force; Mil poder disuasorio deterrent force4. [autorización] power, authorization;[documento] power of attorney;dar poderes a alguien para que haga algo to authorize sb to do sth;tener plenos poderes para hacer algo to be fully authorized to do sth;por poderes by proxy;poder notarial power of attorney [witnessed by a notary]♦ vi1. [tener facultad, capacidad] can, to be able to;no puedo decírtelo I can't tell you, I'm unable to tell you;ahora mismo no podemos atenderle, llame más tarde we can't o we are unable to take your call right now, please call later;¿puede correrse un poco, por favor? could you move up a bit, please?;al final pudo salir de allí in the end she managed to get out of there;¡así no se puede hacer nada! we'll never get anywhere like this!;de poder ir, sería a partir de las siete if I manage to o can make it, it will be after seven;en cuanto pueda as soon as possible;si puedo, te llamaré I'll call you if I get the chance2. [tener permiso] can, may;no puedo salir por la noche I'm not allowed to o I can't go out at night;¿podríamos ir contigo? could we go with you?;¿podría hablar un momento con usted? could I have a word with you?;¿se pueden hacer fotos? can we o are we allowed to take photos?;¿puedo fumar aquí? may o can I smoke here?;no se puede fumar you're not allowed to smoke;¿se puede? may I come in?;¿se puede saber dónde te habías metido? might I know o would you mind telling me where you were?3. [ser capaz moralmente] can;no podemos portarnos así con él we can't treat him like that;¿cómo puedes decir una cosa así? how can you say such a thing?4. [tener posibilidad, ser posible] may, can;puede volver de un momento a otro she could come back any moment;puedo haberlo perdido I may have lost it;podías haber cogido el tren you could have caught the train;puede estallar la guerra war could o may break out;¡habría podido invitarnos!, ¡podría habernos invitado! [expresa enfado] she could o might have invited us!;[tarea, problema] to be able to cope with;¿puedes con todas las bolsas? can you manage all those bags?;no puedo con este baúl, ¿me ayudas a levantarlo? I can't lift this trunk on my own, can you give me a hand?;no poder con algo/alguien [no soportar] not to be able to stand sth/sb;no puedo con la hipocresía I can't stand hypocrisy;¡contigo no hay quien pueda! you're impossible!es avaro a más no poder he's as miserly as can be;llovía a más no poder it was absolutely pouring down;la pierna me dolía a más no poder you can't imagine how much my leg was hurting;no poder más [estar cansado] to be too tired to carry on;[estar harto de comer] to be full (up); [estar enfadado, harto] to have had enough;no pude por menos que reírme I had to laugh, I couldn't help but laugh;Fam¡ya podrás, con una máquina como esa! anyone could do it with a machine like that!;no puedo con mi alma I'm ready to drop♦ v impersonal[ser posible] may;puede que llueva it may o might rain;puede que se haya equivocado she may be wrong;¿vendrás mañana? – puede will you come tomorrow? – I may do;puede que sí o puede que no maybe, maybe not;puede ser perhaps, maybe;si puede ser, a poder ser if (at all) possible;lo siento, pero no va a poder ser I'm sorry, but it's not going to be possible;puede ser que no lo sepa she may not know;¡no puede ser que sea ya tan tarde! surely it can't be that late already!♦ vt1. [ser más fuerte que] to be stronger than;tú eres más alto, pero yo te puedo you may be taller than me, but I could still beat you up;mi coche le puede al tuyo my car is faster than yours any dayle pudo su derrota, todavía no se repone losing really got to her, she still hasn't got over it* * *I v/aux1 capacidad can, be able to;no pude hablar con ella I wasn’t able to talk to her2 permiso can, be allowed to;¿puedo ir contigo? can o may I come with you?3 posibilidad may, might;¡podías habérselo dicho! you could have o you might have told himII v/i:me puede he can beat me;es franco a más no poder fam he’s as frank as they come fam ;comimos a más no poder fam we ate to bursting point fam ;no puedo más I can’t take any more, I’ve had enough;a poder ser if possible;puede ser perhaps, maybe;¡no puede ser! it can’t be!, that can’t be right!;puede que perhaps, maybe;puede ser que no lo sepa maybe o perhaps he doesn’t know;¿se puede? can I come in?, do you mind if I come in?;no pude menos de insultarle insulting him was the least I could doen poder de alguien in s.o.’s hands;plenos poderes pl full authority sg ;por poderes, L.Am.los poder es públicos the authorities* * *poder {58} v aux1) : to be able to, canno puede hablar: he can't speakpuede llover: it may rain at any moment¿cómo puede ser?: how can that be?¿puedo ir a la fiesta?: can I go to the party?¿se puede?: may I come in?poder vi1) : to beat, to defeatcree que le puede a cualquiera: he thinks he can beat anyone2) : to be possible¿crees que vendrán? - puede (que sí): do you think they'll come? - maybe3)poder con : to cope with, to manage¡no puedo con estos niños!: I can't handle these children!4)no poder más : to have had enoughno puede más: she can't take anymore5)no poder menos que : to not be able to helpno pudo menos que asombrarse: she couldn't help but be amazedpoder nm1) : control, powerpoder adquisitivo: purchasing power2) : authorityel poder legislativo: the legislature3) : possessionestá en mi poder: it's in my hands4) : strength, forcepoder militar: military might* * *poder1 n (en general) powerpoder2 vb1. (capacidad, posibilidad) can / could / to be able to¿puedo echarte una mano? can I give you a hand?¿qué podemos comprarle? what can we buy her?¿cuándo podrás venir? when will you be able to come?2. (permiso) can / may¿puedo hablar con el jefe? can I speak to the boss?¿se puede pasar? can I come in?3. (probabilidad) may / could / mightpuede que venga, puede que no he might come, he might notpoder con to manage / to cope with -
12 partagé
partage [paʀtaʒ]masculine nouna. ( = division) [de terrain, surface] division ; [de gâteau] cuttingb. ( = distribution) [de butin, héritage] sharing out• donner/recevoir qch en partage to give/receive sth in a will* * *paʀtaʒnom masculin1) ( découpage) dividing, sharingle partage des gains se fera entre 20 personnes — the profits will be split between ou shared out among 20 people
2) ( distribution) distribution3) ( répartition) sharing, divisionrégner/gouverner sans partage — to reign/to govern absolutely
le partage des voix — Politique the division of votes
4) ( séparation) division, partitionun plan de partage d'un territoire en deux zones — a plan to divide ou partition a territory into two zones
5) ( part)il a reçu la malchance en partage — fig his lot is an unhappy one
* * *paʀtaʒ nm1) (action de diviser qch en parts) [somme, quantité, surface] division, dividing, dividing up2) (action de se partager qch) sharing3) (action de répartir qch entre plusieurs personnes) sharing out4) (action de morceler) division, dividing, splittingle partage d'un territoire en deux zones — the division of a territory into two zones, the splitting of a territory into two zones
sans partage (admiration) — unqualified, (pouvoir, hégémonie, victoire, triomphe) absolute
* * *partage nm1 ( découpage) dividing, sharing; le partage des gains se fera entre 20 personnes the profits will be split between ou shared out among 20 people; ils ont eu des problèmes de partage familial they have had family problems in dividing up the inheritance; ils ont toujours eu le souci du partage they were always careful to share things out;2 ( distribution) distribution; le partage des terres n'était pas équitable the lands had not been shared out fairly; les enfants ont fait eux-mêmes le partage des gâteaux the children shared out the cakes between themselves; le partage du pain the breaking of the bread;3 ( répartition) sharing (avec with), division (avec with); régner/gouverner sans partage to reign/to govern absolutely; avec une joie sans partage with unadulterated delight; une victoire sans partage a total victory; le partage des voix Pol the division of votes; comment se présente le partage des voix entre les candidats? how are the votes split between the candidates?;4 ( séparation) division (en into), partition (en into); le partage d'un territoire en deux the division ou partition of a territory into two; un plan de partage d'un territoire en deux zones a plan to divide or partition a territory into two zones;5 ( part) share; fig ( sort) lot; recevoir qch en partage to be left sth (in a will); il a reçu la malchance en partage fig his lot is an unhappy one.3. INFORMATIQUE -
13 BERA
* * *I)(ber; bar, bárum; borinn), v.I.1) to bear, carry, convey (bar B. biskup í börum suðr í Hvamm);bera (farm) af skipi, to unload a ship;bera (mat) af borði, to take (the meat) off the table;bera e-t á hesti, to carry on horseback;2) to wear (bera klæði, vápn, kórónu);bera œgishjálm, to inspire fear and awe;3) to bear, produce, yield (jörðin berr gras; tré bera aldin, epli);4) to bear, give birth to, esp. of sheep and cows;kýr hafði borit kálf, had calved;absol., ván at hón mundi bera, that the cow would calve;the pp. is used of men; hann hafði verit blindr borinn, born blind;verða borinn í þenna heim, to be born into this world;þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, born to;borinn e-m, frá e-m (rare), born of;Nótt var Nörvi borin, was the daughter of N.;borinn Sigmundi, son of S.;5) bera e-n afli, ofrafli, ofrliði, ofrmagni, ofríki, to bear one down, overcome, oppress, one by odds or superior force;bera e-n ráðum, to overrule one;bera e-n málum, to bear one down (wrongfully) in a lawsuit;bera e-n sök, to charge one with a fault;bera e-n bjóri, to make drunk with beer;verða bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise;borinn verkjum, overcome by pains;þess er borin ván, there is no hope, all hope is gone;borinn baugum, bribed; cf. bera fé á e-n, to bribe one;6) to lear, be capable of bearing (of a ship, horse, vehicle);þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, with as much as they could carry;fig., to sustain, support (svá mikill mannfjöldi, at landit fekk eigi borit);of persons, to bear up against, endure, support (grief, sorrow, etc.);absol., bar hann drengiliga, he bore it manfully;similarly, bera (harm) af sér, berast vel (illa, lítt) af;bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore up bravely;hversu berst Auðr af um bróðurdauðann, how does she bear it?hon berst af lítt, she is much cast down;bera sik vel upp, to bear well up against;7) bera e-t á, e-n á hendr e-m, to charge or tax one with (eigi erum vér þess valdir, er þú berr á oss);bera (kvið) á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty (í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn);bera af e-m (kviðinn), to give a verdict for;bera e-t af sér, to deny having done a thing;bera or bera vitni, vætti, to bear witness, testify;bera or bera um e-t, to give a verdict in a case;bera e-n sannan at sök, to prove guilty by evidence;bera e-n undan sök, to acquit;bera í sundr frændsemi þeirra, to prove (by evidence) that they are not relations;bera e-m vel (illa) söguna, to give a favourable (unfavourable) account of one;refl. (pass.), berast, to be proved by evidence (þótt þér berist þat faðerni, er þú segir);8) to set forth, report, tell;bera e-m kveðju (orð, orðsending), to bring one a greeting, compliments (word, message);bera or bera fram erindi sín fyrir e-n, to state (tell) one’s errand or to plead one’s case before one;bera e-m njósn, to apprise one;bera e-t upp, to produce, mention, tell;bera upp gátu, to give (propound) a riddle;bera upp erindi sín, to state one’s errand;bera saman ráð sín, to consult together;eyddist það ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed;9) to keep, hold, bear, of a title (bera jarlnafn, konnungsnafn);bera (eigi) giptu, gæfu, hammingju, auðnu til e-s, (not) to have the good fortune to do a thing (bar hann enga gæfu til at þjóna þér);bera vit, skyn, kunnáttu á e-t, to have knowledge of, uniderstanding about;vel viti borinn, endowed with a good understanding;bera hug, áræði, þor, traust til e-s, to have courage, confidence to do a thing;bera áhyggju fyrir e-u, to be concerned about;bera ást, elsku, hatr til e-s, to bear affection, love, hatred to;10) to bear off or away, carry off (some gain);bera sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in;hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orustum, he had been victorious in two battles;bera hærra (lægra) hlut to get the best (the worst) of it;bera efra (hærra) skjöld, to gain the victory;bera hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), to be in high (low) spirits;bera halann bratt, lágt, to cock up or let fall the tail, to be in high or low spirits;11) with preps.:bera af e-m, to surpass;en þó bar Bolli af, surpassed all the rest;bera af sér högg, lag to ward off, parry a blow or thrust;bera eld at, to set fire to;bera fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one;bera vápn á e-n, to attack one with sharp weapons;bera á or í, to smear, anoint (bera vatn í augu sér, bera tjöru í höfuð sér);bera e-t til, to apply to, to try if it fits (bera til hvern lykil af öðrum at portinu);bera e-t um, to wind round;þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body;bera um með e-n, to bear with, have patience with;bera út barn, to expose a child;12) refl., berast mikit (lítit) á, to bear oneself proudly (humbly);láta af berast, to die;láta fyrir berast e-s staðar, to stay, remain in a place (for shelter);berast e-t fyrir, to design a thing (barst hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur);at njósna um, hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about;berast vápn á, to attack one another;berast at or til, to happen;þat barst at (happened) á einhverju sumri;ef svá harðliga kann til at berast, if that misfortune does happen;berast í móti, to happen, occur;hefir þetta vel í móti borizt, it is a happy coincidence;berast við, to be prevented;ok nú lét almáttugr guð við berast kirkjubrunann, prevented, stopped the burning of the church;II. impers., denoting a sort of passive or involuntary motion;1) with acc., it bears or carries one to a place;alla berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end);bar hann (acc.) þá ofan gegnt Ösuri, he happened to come down just opposite to Ö.;esp. of ships and sailors; berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eða annarra landa, we drift to Iceland or other countries;þá (acc.) bar suðr í haf, they were carried out southwards;Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, S. came suddenly upon them;ef hann (acc.) skyldi bera þar at, if he should happen to come there;e-n berr yfir, one is borne onwards, of a bird flying, a man riding;hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, it passed quickly (of a flying meteor);2) followed by preps.:Gunnar sér, at rauðan kyrtil bar við glugginn, that a red kirtle passed before the window;hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, there was nowhere a shadow;e-t berr fram (hátt), is prominent;Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingu ok bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, stood out conspicuously;e-t berr á milli, comes between;leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect;fig. e-m berr e-t á milli, they are at variance about a thing;mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, many things come now before my eyes;veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m, game falls to one’s lot;e-t berr undan, goes amiss, fails;bera saman, to coincide;bar nöfn þeirra saman, they had the same name;fig., with dat.; bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the stories agreed well together;fund várn bar saman, we met;3) bera at, til, við, at hendi, til handa, to befall, happen, with dat. of the person;svá bar at einn vetr, it happened one winter;þó at þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, has befallen us;bar honum svá til, it so befell him;þat bar við (it so happened), at Högni kom;raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by fact;4) of time, to fall upon;ef þing (acc.) berr á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls in the holy week;bera í móti, to coincide, happen exactly at the same time;5) denoting cause;e-t berr til, causes a thing;konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief;ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason;berr e-m nauðsyn til e-s, one is obliged to do a thing;6) e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot;hon á arf at taka, þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn;e-t berr frá, is surpassing;er sagt, at þat (acc.) bæri frá, hvé vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they spoke;7) e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden;e-t berr stóru, stórum (stœrrum), it amounts to much (more), it matters a great deal (more), it is of great (greater) importance;8) absol. or with an adv., vel, illa, with infin.;e-m berr (vel, illa) at gera e-t, it becomes, beseems one (well, ill) to do a thing (berr yðr vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli);used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, or unbeseeming, improper, unfit (þat þykkir eigi illa bera, at).(að), v. to make bare (hon beraði likam sinn).* * *1.u, f.I. [björn], a she-bear, Lat. ursa; the primitive root ‘ber’ remains only in this word (cp. berserkr and berfjall), björn (q. v.) being the masc. in use, Landn. 176, Fas. i. 367, Vkv. 9: in many Icel. local names, Beru-fjörðr, -vík, from Polar bears; fem. names, Bera, Hallbera, etc., Landn.II. a shield, poët., the proverb, baugr er á beru sæmstr, to a shield fits best a baugr (q. v.), Lex. Poët., Edda (Gl.); hence names of poems Beru-drápa, Eg.2.bar, báru, borit, pres. berr,—poët. forms with the suffixed negative; 3rd pers. sing. pres. Indic. berrat, Hm. 10; 3rd pers. sing. pret. barat, Vellekla; 1st pers. sing. barkak, Eb. 62 (in a verse); barkat ek, Hs. 8; 2nd pers. sing. bartattu; 3rd pers. pl. bárut, etc., v. Lex. Poët. [Gr. φέρειν; Lat. ferre; Ulf. bairan; A. S. beran; Germ. gebären; Engl. bear; Swed. bära; Dan. bære].A. Lat. ferre, portare:I. prop. with a sense of motion, to bear, carry, by means of the body, of animals, of vehicles, etc., with acc., Egil tók mjöðdrekku eina mikla, ok bar undir hendi sér, Eg. 237; bar hann heim hrís, Rm. 9; konungr lét bera inn kistur tvær, báru tveir menn hverja, Eg. 310; bera farm af skipi, to unload a ship, Ld. 32; bera (farm) á skip, to load a ship, Nj. 182; tóku alla ösku ok báru á á ( amnem) út, 623, 36; ok bar þat ( carried it) í kerald, 43, K. Þ. K. 92; b. mat á borð, í stofu, to put the meat on table, in the oven; b. mat af borði, to take it off table, Eb. 36, 266, Nj. 75, Fms. ix. 219, etc.2. Lat. gestare, ferre, denoting to wear clothes, to carry weapons; skikkja dýr er konungr hafði borit, Eg. 318; b. kórónu, to wear the crown, Fms. x. 16; atgeir, Nj. 119; vápn, 209: metaph., b. ægishjálm, to inspire fear and awe; b. merki, to carry the flag in a battle, Nj. 274, Orkn. 28, 30, 38, Fms. v. 64, vi. 413; bera fram merki, to advance, move in a battle, vi. 406.3. b. e-t á hesti (áburðr), to carry on horseback; Auðunn bar mat á hesti, Grett. 107; ok bar hrís á hesti, 76 new Ed.; þeir báru á sjau hestum, 98 new Ed.II. without a sense of motion:1. to give birth to; [the root of barn, bairn; byrja, incipere; burðr, partus; and burr, filius: cp. Lat. parĕre; also Gr. φέρειν, Lat. ferre, of child-bearing.] In Icel. prose, old as well as mod., ‘ala’ and ‘fæða’ are used of women; but ‘bera,’ of cows and sheep; hence sauðburðr, casting of lambs, kýrburðr; a cow is snembær, siðbær, Jólabær, calves early, late, at Yule time, etc.; var ekki ván at hon ( the cow) mundi b. fyr en um várit, Bs. i. 193, 194; kýr hafði borit kálf, Bjarn. 32; bar hvárrtveggi sauðrinn sinn burð, Stj. 178: the participle borinn is used of men in a great many compds in a general sense, aptrborinn, árborinn, endrborinn, frjálsborinn, goðborinn, höldborinn, hersborinn, konungborinn, óðalborinn, samborinn, sundrborinn, velborinn, úborinn, þrælborinn, etc.; also out of compds, mun ek eigi upp gefa þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, … entitled to by inheritance, Ld. 102; hann hafði blindr verit borinn, born blind, Nj. 152, Hdl. 34, 42, Vsp. 2: esp. borinn e-m, born of one, Rm. 39, Hdl. 12, 23, 27, Hðm. 2, Gs. 9, Vþm. 25, Stor. 16, Vkv. 15; borinn frá e-m, Hdl. 24: the other tenses are in theol. Prose used of Christ, hans blezaða son er virðist at láta berast hingað í heim af sinni blezaðri móður, Fms. i. 281; otherwise only in poetry, eina dóttur (acc.) berr álfröðull (viz. the sun, regarded as the mother), Vþm. 47; hann Gjálp um bar, hann Greip um bar …, Hdl. 36: borit (sup.), Hkv. 1. 1.β. of trees, flowers; b. ávöxt, blóm …, to bear fruit, flower … (freq.); bar aldinviðrinn tvennan blóma, Fms. ix. 265; cp. the phrase, bera sitt barr, v. barr.2. denoting to load, with acc. of the person and dat. of the thing:α. in prop. sense; hann hafði borit sik mjök vápnum, he had loaded himself with arms, i. e. wore heavy armour, Sturl. iii. 250.β. but mostly in a metaph. sense; b. e-n ofrafli, ofrmagni, ofrliði, ofríki, magni, to bear one down, to overcome, oppress one, by odds or superior force, Grág. i. 101, ii. 195, Nj. 80, Hkr. ii. 371, Gþl. 474, Stj. 512, Fms. iii. 175 (in the last passage a dat. pers. badly); b. e-n ráðum, to overrule one, Nj. 198, Ld. 296; b. e-n málum, to bearhim down (wrongfully) in a lawsuit, Nj. 151; b. e-n bjóri, to make drunk, Vkv. 26: medic., borinn verkjum, sótt, Bjarn. 68, Og. 5; bölvi, Gg. 2: borne down, feeling heavy pains; þess er borin ván, no hope, all hope is gone, Ld. 250; borinn sök, charged with a cause, Fms. v. 324, H. E. i. 561; bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise, Fms. iv. 111; b. fé, gull á e-n, to bring one a fee, gold, i. e. to bribe one, Nj. 62; borinn baugum, bribed, Alvm. 5; always in a bad sense, cp. the law phrase, b. fé í dóm, to bribe a court, Grág., Nj. 240.3. to bear, support, sustain, Lat. sustinere, lolerare, ferre:α. properly, of a ship, horse, vehicle, to bear, be capable of bearing; þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, all that they could carry, Eb. 302;—a ship ‘berr’ ( carries) such and such a weight; but ‘tekr’ ( takes) denotes a measure of fluids.β. metaph. to sustain, support; dreif þannig svá mikill mannfjöldi at landit fékk eigi borit, Hkr. i. 56; but metaph. to bear up against, endure, support grief, sorrow, etc., sýndist öllum at Guð hefði nær ætlað hvat hann mundi b. mega, Bs. i. 139; biðr hann friðar ok þykist ekki mega b. reiði hans, Fms. iii. 80: the phrase, b. harm sinn í hljóði, to suffer silently; b. svívirðing, x. 333: absol., þótti honum mikit víg Kjartans, en þó bar hann drengilega, he bore it manfully, Ld. 226; er þat úvizka, at b. eigi slíkt, not to bear or put up with, Glúm. 327; b. harm, to grieve, Fms. xi. 425: in the phrases, b. sik, b. af sér, berask, berask vel (illa, lítt), to bear oneself, to bear up against misfortune; Guðrúnu þótti mikit fráfall Þorkels, en þó bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore her bravely up, Ld. 326–328; lézt hafa spurt at ekkjan bæri vel af sér harmana, Eb. 88; berask af; hversu bersk Auðr af um bróðurdauðann? (how does she bear it?); hón bersk af lítt ( she is much borne down) ok þykir mikit, Gísl. 24; niun oss vandara gört en öðrum at vér berim oss vel (Lat. fortiter ferre), Nj. 197; engi maðr hefði þar jamvel borit sik, none bad borne himself so boldly, Sturl. iii. 132; b. sik vel upp, to bear well up against, bear a stout heart, Hrafn. 17; b. sik beiskliga ( sorely), Stj. 143; b. sik lítt, to be downcast, Fms. ii. 61; b. sik at göra e-t, to do one’s best, try a thing.III. in law terms or modes of procedure:1. bera járn, the ordeal of bearing hot iron in the hand, cp. járnburðr, skírsla. This custom was introduced into Scandinavia together with Christianity from Germany and England, and superseded the old heathen ordeals ‘hólmganga,’ and ‘ganga undir jarðarmen,’ v. this word. In Norway, during the civil wars, it was esp. used in proof of paternity of the various pretenders to the crown, Fms. vii. 164, 200, ix. Hák. S. ch. 14, 41–45, viii. (Sverr. S.) ch. 150, xi. (Jómsv. S.) ch. 11, Grett. ch. 41, cp. N. G. L. i. 145, 389. Trial by ordeal was abolished in Norway A. D. 1247. In Icel. It was very rarely mentioned, vide however Lv. ch. 23 (paternity), twice or thrice in the Sturl. i. 56, 65, 147, and Grág. i. 341, 361; it seems to have been very seldom used there, (the passage in Grett. S. l. c. refers to Norway.)2. bera út (hence útburðr, q. v.), to expose children; on this heathen custom, vide Grimm R. A. In heathen Icel., as in other parts of heathen Scandinavia, it was a lawful act, but seldom exercised; the chief passages on record are, Gunnl. S. ch. 3 (ok þat var þá siðvandi nokkurr, er land var allt alheiðit, at þeir menn er félitlir vórn, en stóð ómegð mjök til handa létu út bera börn sín, ok þótti þó illa gört ávalt), Fs. Vd. ch. 37, Harð. S. ch. 8, Rd. ch. 7, Landn. v. ch. 6, Finnb. ch. 2, Þorst. Uxaf. ch. 4, Hervar. S. ch. 4, Fas. i. 547 (a romance); cp. Jómsv. S. ch. 1. On the introduction of Christianity into Icel. A. D. 1000, it was resolved that, in regard to eating of horse-flesh and exposure of children, the old laws should remain in force, Íb. ch. 9; as Grimm remarks, the exposure must take place immediately after birth, before the child had tasted food of any kind whatever, and before it was besprinkled with water (ausa vatni) or shown to the father, who had to fix its name; exposure, after any of these acts, was murder, cp. the story of Liafburga told by Grimm R. A.); v. Also a Latin essay at the end of the Gunnl. S. (Ed. 1775). The Christian Jus Eccl. put an end to this heathen barbarism by stating at its very beginning, ala skal barn hvert er borit verðr, i. e. all children, if not of monstrous shape, shall be brought up, N. G. L. i. 339, 363.β. b. út (now more usual, hefja út, Am. 100), to carry out for burial; vera erfðr ok tit borinn, Odd. 20; var hann heygðr, ok út borinn at fornum sið, Fb. i. 123; b. á bál, to place (the body and treasures) upon the pile, the mode of burying in the old heathen time, Fas. i. 487 (in a verse); var hon borin á bálit ok slegit í eldi, Edda 38.B. Various and metaph. cases.I. denoting motion:1. ‘bera’ is in the Grág. the standing law term for delivery of a verdict by a jury (búar), either ‘bera’ absol. or adding kvið ( verdict); bera á e-n, or b. kvið á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty; bera af e-m, or b. af e-m kviðinn, to give a verdict for; or generally, bera, or b. um e-t, to give a verdict in a case; bera, or b. vitni, vætti, also simply means to testify, to witness, Nj. 111, cp. kviðburðr ( delivering of verdict), vitnisburðr ( bearing witness), Grág. ii. 28; eigi eigu búar ( jurors) enn at b. um þat hvat lög eru á landi hér, the jurors have not to give verdict in (to decide) what is law in the country, cp. the Engl. maxim, that jurors have only to decide the question of evidence, not of law, Grág. (Kb.) ch. 85; eigi eru búar skildir at b. um hvatvetna; um engi mál eigu þeir at skilja, þau er erlendis ( abroad) hafa görzt, id.; the form in delivering the verdict—höfum vér ( the jurors), orðit á eitt sáttir, berum á kviðburðinn, berum hann sannan at sökinni, Nj. 238, Grág. i. 49, 22, 138, etc.; í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn, id.; b. annattveggja af eðr á; b. undan, to discharge, Nj. 135; b. kvið í hag ( for), Grág. i. 55; b. lýsingar vætti, Nj. 87; b. vitni ok vætti, 28, 43, 44; b. ljúgvitni, to bear false witness, Grág. i. 28; b. orð, to bear witness to a speech, 43; bera frændsemi sundr, to prove that they are not relations, N. G. L. i. 147: reflex., berask ór vætti, to prove that oneself is wrongly summoned to bear witness or to give a verdict, 44: berask in a pass. sense, to be proved by evidence, ef vanefni b. þess manns er á hönd var lýst, Grág. i. 257; nema jafnmæli berisk, 229; þótt þér berisk þat faðerni er þú segir, Fms. vii. 164; hann kvaðst ætla, at honum mundi berask, that he would be able to get evidence for, Fs. 46.β. gener. and not as a law term; b. á, b. á hendr, to charge; b. e-n undan, to discharge, Fs. 95; eigi erum vér þessa valdir er þú berr á oss, Nj. 238, Ld. 206, Fms. iv. 380, xi. 251, Th. 78; b. e-m á brýnn, to throw in one’s face, to accuse, Greg. 51; b. af sér, to deny; eigi mun ek af mér b., at… ( non diffitebor), Nj. 271; b. e-m gott vitni, to give one a good…, 11; b. e-m vel (illa) söguna, to bear favourable (unfavourable) witness of one, 271.2. to bear by word of mouth, report, tell, Lat. referre; either absol. or adding kveðju, orð, orðsending, eyrindi, boð, sögu, njósn, frétt…, or by adding a prep., b. fram, frá, upp, fyrir; b. kveðju, to bring a greeting, compliment, Eg. 127; b. erindi (sín) fyrir e-n, to plead one’s case before one, or to tell one’s errand, 472, 473; b. njósn, to apprise, Nj. 131; b. fram, to deliver (a speech), talaði jungherra Magnús hit fyrsta erindi (M. made his first speech in public), ok fanst mönnum mikit um hversu úbernsliga fram var borit, Fms. x. 53; (in mod. usage, b. fram denotes gramm. to pronounce, hence ‘framburðr,’ pronunciation); mun ek þat nú fram b., I shall now tell, produce it, Ld. 256, Eg. 37; b. frá, to attest, relate with emphasis; má þat frá b., Dropl. 21; b. upp, to produce, mention, tell, þótt slík lygi sé upp borin fyrir hann, though such a lie be told him, Eg. 59; þær (viz. charges) urðu engar upp bornar ( produced) við Rút, Nj. 11; berr Sigtryggr þegar upp erindi sín (cp. Germ. ojfenbaren), 271, Ld. 256; b. upp gátu, to give (propound) a riddle, Stj. 411, Fas. i. 464; b. fyrir, to plead as an excuse; b. saman ráð sín, or the like, to consult, Nj. 91; eyddist þat ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed, Post. 656 A. ii; b. til skripta, to confess (eccl.), of auricular confession, Hom. 124, 655 xx.II. in a metaphorical or circumlocutory sense, and without any sense of motion, to keep, hold, bear, of a title; b. nafn, to bear a name, esp. as honour or distinction; tignar nafn, haulds nafn, jarls nafn, lends manns nafn, konungs nafn, bónda nafn, Fms. i. 17, vi. 278, xi. 44, Gþl. 106: in a more metaph. sense, denoting endowments, luck, disposition, or the like, b. (ekki) gæfu, hamingju, auðnu til e-s, to enjoy (enjoy not) good or bad luck, etc.; at Þórólfr mundi eigi allsendis gæfu til b. um vináttu við Harald, Eg. 75, 112, 473, Fms. iv. 164, i. 218; úhamingju, 219; b. vit, skyn, kunnáttu á (yfir) e-t, to bring wit, knowledge, etc., to bear upon a thing, xi. 438, Band. 7; hence vel (illa) viti borinn, well (ill) endowed with wit, Eg. 51; vel hyggjandi borinn, well endowed with reason, Grág. ii; b. hug, traust, áræði, þor, til e-s, to have courage, confidence … to do a thing, Gullþ. 47, Fms. ix. 220, Band. 7; b. áhyggju, önn fyrir, to care, be concerned about, Fms. x. 318; b. ást, elsku til e-s, to bear affection, love to one; b. hatr, to hate: b. svört augu, to have dark eyes, poët., Korm. (in a verse); b. snart hjarta, Hom. 5; vant er þat af sjá hvar hvergi berr hjarta sitt, where he keeps his heart, Orkn. 474; b. gott hjarta, to bear a proud heart, Lex. Poët., etc. etc.; b. skyndi at um e-t, to make speed with a thing, Lat. festinare, Fms. viii. 57.2. with some sense of motion, to bear off or away, carry off, gain, in such phrases as, b. sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in …; hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orrustum, er frægstar hafa verit, he had borne off the victory in two battles, Fms. xi. 186; bera banaorð af e-m, to slay one in a fight, to be the victor; Þorr berr banaorð af Miðgarðsormi, Edda 42, Fms. x. 400: it seems properly to mean, to bear off the fame of having killed a man; verðat svá rík sköp, at Regin skyli mitt banorð bera, Fm. 39; b. hærra, lægra hlut, ‘to bear off the higher or the lower lot,’ i. e. to get the best or the worst of it, or the metaphor is taken from a sortilege, Fms. ii. 268, i. 59, vi. 412; b. efra, hærra skjöld, to carry the highest shield, to get the victory, x. 394, Lex. Poët.; b. hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), i. e. to be in high or low spirits, Nj. 91; but also, b. halann bratt (lágt), to cock up or let fall the tail (metaph. from cattle), to be in an exultant or low mood: sundry phrases, as, b. bein, to rest the bones, be buried; far þú til Íslands, þar mun þér auðið verða beinin at b., Grett. 91 A; en þó hygg ek at þú munir hér b. beinin í Norðrálfunni, Orkn. 142; b. fyrir borð, to throw overboard, metaph. to oppress; verðr Þórhalli nú fyrir borð borinn, Th. was defied, set at naught, Fær. 234; b. brjóst fyrir e-m, to be the breast-shield, protection of one, Fms. vii. 263: also, b. hönd fyrir höfuð sér, metaph. to put one’s hand before one’s head, i. e. to defend oneself; b. ægishjálm yfir e-m, to keep one in awe and submission, Fm. 16, vide A. I. 2.III. connected with prepp., b. af, and (rarely) yfir (cp. afburðr, yfirburðr), to excel, surpass; eigi sá hvárttveggja féit er af öðrum berr, who gets the best of it, Nj. 15; en þó bar Bolli af, B. surpassed all the rest, Ld. 330; þat mannval bar eigi minnr af öðrum mönnum um fríðleik, afi ok fræknleik, en Ormrinn Langi af öðrum skipum, Fms. ii. 252; at hinn útlendi skal yfir b. ( outdo) þann sem Enskir kalla meistara, xi. 431: b. til, to apply, try if it fits; en er þeir báru til (viz. shoes to the hoof of a horse), þá var sem hæfði hestinum, ix. 55; bera til hvern lykil at öðrum at portinu, Thom. 141; b. e-t við, to try it on (hence viðburðr, experiment, effort): b. um, to wind round, as a cable round a pole or the like, Nj. 115; þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body, Fms. ix. 219; ‘b. e-t undir e-n’ is to consult one, ellipt., b. undir dóm e-s; ‘b. e-t fyrir’ is to feign, use as excuse: b. á, í, to smear, anoint; b. vatn í augu sér, Rb. 354; b. tjöru í höfuð sér, Nj. 181, Hom. 70, 73, cp. áburðr; b. gull, silfr, á, to ornament with gold or silver, Ld. 114, Finnb. 258: is now also used = to dung, b. á völl; b. vápn á e-n, to attack one with sharp weapons, Eg. 583, Fms. xi. 334: b. eld at, to set fire to, Nj. 122; b. fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one, Fms. x. 172, Hm. 150: metaph. reflex., bönd berask at e-m, a law term, the evidence bears against one; b. af sér, to parry off; Gyrðr berr af sér lagit, G. parries the thrust off, Fms. x. 421; cp. A. II. 3. β.IV. reflex., berask mikit á (cp. áburðr), to bear oneself proudly, or b. lítið á, to bear oneself humbly; hann var hinn kátasti ok barst á mikit, Fms. ii. 68, viii. 219, Eb. 258; b. lítið á, Clem. 35; láta af berask, to die; Óttarr vill skipa til um fjárfar sitt áðr hann láti af b., Fms. ii. 12: berask fyrir, to abide in a place as an asylum, seek shelter; hér munu vit láta fyrir b., Fas. iii. 471; berask e-t fyrir, to design a thing, be busy about, barsk hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur, Greg. 53; at njósna um hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about, Fms. iv. 184, Vígl. 19.β. recipr. in the phrase, berask banaspjót eptir, to seek for one another’s life, Glúm. 354: b. vápn á, of a mutual attack with sharp weapons, Fms. viii. 53.γ. pass., sár berask á e-n, of one in the heat of battle beginning to get wounds and give way, Nj.:—berask við, to be prevented, not to do; ok nú lét Almáttugr Guð við berast kirkjubrunnann, stopped, prevented the burning of the church, Fms. v. 144; en mér þætti gott ef við bærist, svá at hón kæmi eigi til þín, vi. 210, vii. 219; ok var þá búit at hann mundi þegar láta hamarinn skjanna honum, en hann lét þat við berask, he bethought himself and did not, Edda 35; því at mönnum þótti sem þannig mundi helzt úhæfa við berask, that mischief would thus be best prevented, Sturl. ii. 6, iii. 80.C. IMPERS.:—with a sort of passive sense, both in a loc. and temp. sense, and gener. denotes an involuntary, passive motion, happening suddenly or by chance:I. with acc. it bears or carries one to a place, i. e. one happens to come; the proverb, alla (acc.) berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end), Lat. omnes una manet nox; bar hann þá ofan gegnt Özuri, he happened to come in his course just opposite to Ö., Lat. delatus est, Dropl. 25: esp. of ships or sailors; nú berr svá til ( happens) herra, at vér komum eigi fram ferðinni, berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eðr annara landa, it bore us to I., i. e. if we drive or drift thither, Fms. iv. 176; þá (acc. pl.) bar suðr í haf, they drifted southwards, Nj. 124.β. as a cricketing term, in the phrase, berr (bar) út knöttinn, the ball rolls out, Gísl. 26, cp. p. 110 where it is transit.; berr Gísli ok út knöttinn, vide Vígl. ch. 11, Grett. ch. 17, Vd. ch. 37, Hallfr. S. ch. 2.γ. Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, Sk. came suddenly upon them, Nj. 144; bar at Hróaldi þegar allan skjöldinn, the shield was dashed against H.’s body, 198; ok skyldu sæta honum, ef hann (acc.) bæri þar at, if he should per chance come, shew himself there, Orkn. 406; e-n berr yfir, it bears one, i. e. one is borne onwards, as a bird flying, a man riding; þóttist vita, at hann (acc.) mundi fljótara yfir bera ef hann riði en gengi, that he would get on more fleetly riding than walking, Hrafn. 7; hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, he passed quickly, of a flying meteor, Nj. 194; e-n berr undan, escapes.2. also with acc. followed by prepp. við, saman, jafnframt, hjá, of bodies coinciding or covering one another: loc., er jafnframt ber jaðrana tungls ok sólar, if the orb of the moon and sun cover each other, Rb. 34; þat kann vera stundum, at tunglit (acc.) berr jafht á millum vár ok sólar (i. e. in a moon eclipse), 108; ber nokkut jaðar (acc.) þess hjá sólar jaðri, 34; Gunnarr sér at rauðan kyrtil (acc.) bar við glugginn, G. sees that a red kirtle passed before the window, Nj. 114; bar fyrir utan þat skip vápnaburð (acc.) heiðingja (gen. pl.), the missiles of the heathens passed over the ship without hurting them, flew too high, Fms. vii. 232; hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, nowhere a shadow, all bright, Nj. 118; þangat sem helzt mátti nokkut yfir þá skugga bera af skóginum, where they were shadowed (hidden) by the trees, Fms. x. 239; e-t berr fram (hátt), a body is prominent, Lat. eminet; Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingunni, bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, king O. stood out conspicuously, ii. 308; b. yfir, þótti mjök bera hljóð (acc.) þar yfir er Ólafr sat, the sound was heard over there where O. sat, Sturl. i. 21; b. á milli, something comes between; leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect, Nj. 263: metaph., e-m berr e-t á milli, they come to dissent, 13, v. 1.; b. fyrir augu (hence fyrirburðr, vision), of a vision or the like; mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, ek sé …, many things come now before my eyes, 104; hann mundi allt þat er fyrir hann hafði borit, i. e. all the dream, 195; eina nótt berr fyrir hann í svefni mikla sýn, Fms. i. 137, Rd. 290; veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m (a metaphor from hunting), sport falls to one’s lot; hér bæri veiði í hendr nú, here would be a game, Nj. 252; e-t berr undan (a metaphor from fishing, hunting term), when one misses one’s opportunity; vel væri þá … at þá veiði (acc.) bæri eigi undan, that this game should not go amiss, 69; en ef þetta (acc.) berr undan, if this breaks down, 63; hon bað hann þá drepa einhvern manna hans, heldr en allt (acc.) bæri undan, rather than that all should go amiss, Eg. 258: absol., þyki mér illa, ef undan berr, if I miss it, Nj. 155; viljum vér ekki at undan beri at…, we will by no means miss it…, Fms. viii. 309, v. 1. The passage Bs. i. 416 (en fjárhlutr sá er átt hafði Ari, bar undan Guðmundi) is hardly correct, fjárhlut þann would run better, cp. bera undir, as a law term, below.II. adding prepp.; b. við, at, til, at hendi, at móti, til handa …, to befall, happen, Lat. accidere, occurrere, with dat. of the person, (v. atburðr, viðburðr, tilburðr); engi hlut skyldi þann at b., no such thing should happen as…, Fms. xi. 76; svá bar at einn vetr, it befell, x. 201; þat hefir nú víst at hendi borit, er…, Nj. 174; þó þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, Eg. 7; b. til handa, id., Sks. 327; bar honum svá til, so it befell him, Fms. xi. 425; at honum bæri engan váðaligan hlut til á veginum, that nothing dangerous should befall him on the way, Stj. 212; bæri þat þá svá við, at hann ryfi, it then perchance might happen, that …, 102; þat bar við at Högni kom, 169, 172, 82; raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by the fact, event, Fms. ix. 474, x. 185.2. temp., e-t berr á, it happens to fall on …; ef þing (acc.) ber á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls on the holy week (Whitsun), Grág. i. 106; ef Crucis messu (acc.) berr á Drottins dag, Rb. 44; berr hana (viz. Petrs messu, June 29) aldrei svá optarr á öldinni, 78; þat er nú berr oss næst, what has occurred of late, Sturl. iii. 182: b. í móti, to happen exactly at a time; þetta (acc.) bar í móti at þenna sama dag andaðist Brandr biskup, Bs. i. 468; b. saman, id.; bar þat saman, at pá var Gunnarr at segja brennusöguna, just when G. was about telling the story, Nj. 269.3. metaph. of agreement or separation; en þat (acc.) þykir mjök saman b. ok þessi frásögn, Fms. x. 276: with dat., bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the records agreed well together, Nj. 100, v. l.; berr nú enn í sundr með þeim, Bjarna ok Þorkatli at sinni, B. and Th. missed each other, Vápn. 25.4. denoting cause; e-t (acc.) berr til …, causes a thing; ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason, Nj. 75; at þat beri til skilnaðar okkars, that this will make us to part (divorce), 261; konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief? Fms. vi. 355; þat berr til tunglhlaups, Rb. 32.β. meiri ván at brátt beri þat (acc.) til bóta, at herviliga steypi hans ríki, i. e. there will soon come help (revenge), Fms. x. 264; fjórir eru þeir hlutir er menn (acc.) berr í ætt á landi hér, there are four cases under which people may be adopted, Grág. i. 361.γ. e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot; hon á arf at taka þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn, 179; mikla erfð (acc.) bar undir hana, Mar. (Fr.); berr yfir, of surpassing, Bs. ii. 121, 158; b. frá, id. (fráburðr); herðimikill svá at þat (acc.) bar frá því sem aðrir menn, Eg. 305; er sagt, at þat bæri frá hve vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they did speak, Jb. 11; bar þat mest frá hversu illa hann var limaðr, but above all, how…, Ó. H. 74.5. with adverbial nouns in a dat. form; e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden; berr þetta (acc.) nú allbráðum, Fms. xi. 139; cp. vera bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise (above); berr stórum, stærrum, it matters a great deal; ætla ek stærrum b. hin lagabrotin (acc.), they are much more important, matter more, vii. 305; var þat góðr kostr, svá at stórum bar, xi. 50; hefir oss orðit svá mikil vanhyggja, at stóru berr, an enormous blunder, Gísl. 51; svá langa leið, at stóru bar, Fas. i. 116; þat berr stórum, hversu mér þóknast vel þeirra athæfi, it amounts to a great deal, my liking their service, i. e. I do greatly like, Fms. ii. 37; eigi berr þat allsmám hversu vel mér líkar, in no small degree do I like, x. 296.β. with dat., it is fitting, becoming; svá mikit sem landeiganda (dat.) berr til at hafa eptir lögum, what he is legally entitled to, Dipl. iii. 10; berr til handa, it falls to one’s lot, v. above, Grág. i. 93.III. answering to Lat. oportet, absolutely or with an adverb, vel, illa, with infinit.; e-m berr, it beseems, becomes one; berr þat ekki né stendr þvílíkum höfuðfeðr, at falsa, Stj. 132; berr yðr (dat.) vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli, Fms. ix. 326; sagði, at þat bar eigi Kristnum mönnum, at særa Guð, x. 22; þá siðu at mér beri vel, Sks. 353 B: used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, unbeseeming, unfit, improper; athæfi þat er vel beri fyrir konungs augliti, 282; þat þykir ok eigi illa bera, at maðr hafi svart skinn til hosna, i. e. it suits pretty well, 301: in case of a pers. pron. in acc. or dat. being added, the sentence becomes personal in order to avoid doubling the impers. sentence, e. g. e-m berr skylda (not skyldu) til, one is bound by duty; veit ek eigi hver skylda (nom.) yðr (acc.) ber til þess at láta jarl einn ráða, Fms. i. 52: also leaving the dat. out, skylda berr til at vera forsjámaðr með honum, vii. 280; eigi berr hér til úviska mín, it is not that I am not knowing, Nj. 135.IV. when the reflex. inflexion is added to the verb, the noun loses its impers. character and is turned from acc. into nom., e. g. þar (þat?) mun hugrinn minn mest hafa fyrir borizt, this is what I suspected, fancied, Lv. 34; cp. hugarburðr, fancy, and e-t berr fyrir e-n (above, C. I. 2); hefir þetta (nom.) vel í móti borizt, a happy coincidence, Nj. 104; ef svá harðliga kann til at berask, if the misfortunes do happen, Gþl. 55; barsk sú úhamingja (nom.) til á Íslandi, that mischief happened (no doubt the passage is thus to be emended), Bs. i. 78, but bar þá úhamingju …; þat (nom.) barsk at, happened, Fms. x. 253; fundir várir (nom.) hafa at borizt nokkurum sinnum, vii. 256; þat barsk at á einhverju sumri, Eg. 154; bærist at um síðir at allr þingheimrinn berðist, 765, cp. berast við, berask fyrir above (B. V.): berast, absol., means to be shaken, knocked about; var þess ván, at fylkingar mundu berast í hergöngunni, that they would be brought into some confusion, Fms. v. 74; Hrólfr gékk at ramliga, ok barst Atli (was shaken, gave away) fyrir orku sakir, þar til er hann féll. Fas. iii. 253; barst Jökull allr fyrir orku sakir (of two wrestling), Ísl. ii. 467, Fms. iii. 189: vide B. IV.D. In mod. usage the strong bera—bar is also used in impersonal phrases, denoting to let a thing be seen, shew, but almost always with a negative preceding, e. g. ekki bar (ber) á því, it could ( can) not be seen; að á engu bæri, láta ekki á bera ( to keep tight), etc. All these phrases are no doubt alterations from the weak verb bera, að, nudare, and never occur in old writers; we have not met with any instance previous to the Reformation; the use is certainly of late date, and affords a rare instance of weak verbs turning into strong; the reverse is more freq. the case. -
14 БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ
Мы приняли следующие сокращения для наиболее часто упоминаемых книг и журналов:IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysisJAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic AssociationSE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)PQ - Psychoanalytic QuarterlyWAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)\О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts\1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.Словарь психоаналитических терминов и понятий > БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ
-
15 of
əv1) (belonging to: a friend of mine.) de2) (away from (a place etc); after (a given time): within five miles of London; within a year of his death.) de3) (written etc by: the plays of Shakespeare.) de4) (belonging to or forming a group: He is one of my friends.) de5) (showing: a picture of my father.) de6) (made from; consisting of: a dress of silk; a collection of pictures.) de7) (used to show an amount, measurement of something: a gallon of petrol; five bags of coal.) de8) (about: an account of his work.) de9) (containing: a box of chocolates.) de10) (used to show a cause: She died of hunger.) de11) (used to show a loss or removal: She was robbed of her jewels.) de12) (used to show the connection between an action and its object: the smoking of a cigarette.) de13) (used to show character, qualities etc: a man of courage.) de14) ((American) (of time) a certain number of minutes before (the hour): It's ten minutes of three.) menosof prep1. de2.oftr[ɒv, ʊnstressed əv]1 (belonging to) de2 (made from) de3 (containing) de4 (showing a part, a quantity) de5 (partitive use) de6 (dates, distance) de7 (apposition) de8 (by) de9 (originating from, living in) de10 (depicting) de11 (cause) de12 (connected with) de13 (with, having) de14 (description) de15 (after superlative) deof ['ʌv, 'ɑv] prep1) from: dea man of the city: un hombre de la ciudada woman of great ability: una mujer de gran capacidadhe died of the flu: murió de la gripe4) by: dethe works of Shakespeare: las obras de Shakespeare5) (indicating contents, material, or quantity) : dea house of wood: una casa de maderaa glass of water: un vaso de aguathe front of the house: el frente de la casa7) about: sobre, detales of the West: los cuentos del Oestethe city of Caracas: la ciudad de Caracas9) for: por, alove of country: amor por la patriafive minutes of ten: las diez menos cincothe eighth of April: el ocho de abrilofprep.• de prep.• menos prep.ɑːv, ɒv, weak form əv1) (indicating relationship, material, content) deit's made of wood — es de madera, está hecho de madera
a colleague of mine/his — un colega mío/suyo
2) ( descriptive use)3)a) ( partitive use)b) ( with superl) de4)a) ( indicating date) deb) ( indicating time)it's ten (minutes) of five — (AmE) son las cinco menos diez, son diez para las cinco (AmL exc RPl)
it's a quarter of five — (AmE) son las cinco menos cuarto, son un cuarto para las cinco (AmL exc RPl)
Jane, his wife of six months... — Jane, con la que lleva/llevaba casado seis meses...
5) ( on the part of)6) ( inherent in)the senselessness of it all, that's what depresses me — es lo absurdo de todo el asunto lo que me deprime
7) ( indicating cause)what did he die of? — ¿de qué murió?
[ɒv, ǝv]PREP1) (indicating possession) deit's no business of yours — aquí no te metas, no tienes que ver con esto
2) (objective genitive) a, hacia3) (partitive etc) dehow much of this do you need? — ¿cuánto necesitas de eso?
of the 12, two were bad — de los 12, dos estaban pasados
most of all — sobre todo, más que nada
4) (indicating cause) por, de5) (agent)6) (indicating material) demade of steel/paper — hecho de acero/papel
7) (descriptive) dea tragedy of her own making — una tragedia que ella misma había labrado, una tragedia de su propia cosecha
8) (=concerning) dewhat do you think of him? — ¿qué piensas de él?
what of it? — ¿y a ti qué (te) importa?, ¿y qué?
9) (indicating deprivation, riddance)it's a quarter of six — (US) son las seis menos cuarto, falta un cuarto para las seis (LAm)
he died of a Friday — frm murió un viernes
to judge of sth — juzgar algo, opinar sobre algo
he was robbed of his watch — le robaron el reloj, se le robó el reloj
* * *[ɑːv, ɒv], weak form [əv]1) (indicating relationship, material, content) deit's made of wood — es de madera, está hecho de madera
a colleague of mine/his — un colega mío/suyo
2) ( descriptive use)3)a) ( partitive use)b) ( with superl) de4)a) ( indicating date) deb) ( indicating time)it's ten (minutes) of five — (AmE) son las cinco menos diez, son diez para las cinco (AmL exc RPl)
it's a quarter of five — (AmE) son las cinco menos cuarto, son un cuarto para las cinco (AmL exc RPl)
Jane, his wife of six months... — Jane, con la que lleva/llevaba casado seis meses...
5) ( on the part of)6) ( inherent in)the senselessness of it all, that's what depresses me — es lo absurdo de todo el asunto lo que me deprime
7) ( indicating cause)what did he die of? — ¿de qué murió?
-
16 right
1) право ( суб'єктивне); праводомагання; справедлива вимога; привілей; права сторона2) правильний; належний; правомірний, справедливий; правий ( у політичному сенсі); реакційний3) відновлювати ( справедливість); виправляти(ся)4) направо•right a wrong done to the person — виправляти шкоду, заподіяну особі
right not to answer any questions that might produce evidence against an accused — право не давати відповідей (не відповідати) на будь-які запитання, що можуть бути використані як свідчення проти обвинуваченого
right not to fulfill one's own obligations — право не виконувати свої зобов'язання ( у зв'язку з невиконанням своїх зобов'язань іншою стороною)
right of a state to request the recall of a foreign envoy as persona non grata — право держави вимагати відкликання іноземного представника як персони нон грата
right of citizens to use their native language in court — право громадян виступати в суді рідною мовою
right of every state to dispose of its wealth and its national resources — право кожної держави розпоряджатися своїми багатствами і природними ресурсами
right of everyone to the opportunity to gain his living by work — право кожної людини на отримання можливості заробляти собі на прожиття власною працею
right of legislative initiative — право законодавчої ініціативи, право законодавства
right of nations to free and independent development — право народів на вільний і незалежний розвиток
right of nations to self-determination up to and including separation as a state — право націй на самовизначення аж до державного відокремлення
right of nations to sovereignty over their natural resources — право націй на суверенітет над своїми природними ресурсами
right of parents to choose their children's education — право батьків на вибір виду освіти для своїх неповнолітніх дітей
right of reception and mission of diplomatic envoys — право приймати і призначати дипломатичних представників
right of representation and performance — право на публічне виконання (п'єси, музичного твору)
right of the accused to have adequate time, facilities and assistance for his defence — = right of the accused to have adequate time, facilities and assistance for his defense право обвинуваченого мати достатньо часу, можливостей і допомоги для свого захисту
right of the accused to have adequate time, facilities and assistance for his defense — = right of the accused to have adequate time, facilities and assistance for his defence
right of the child to live before birth from the moment of conception — право дитини на життя до її народження з моменту зачаття
right of unhindered communication with the authorities of the appointing state — право безперешкодних зносин із властями своєї держави
right to a counsel from the time that an accused is taken into custody — право на адвоката з часу арешту (зняття під варту) обвинуваченого
right to arrange meetings, processions and picketing — право на мітинги, демонстрації і пікетування
right to be confronted with witness — право очної ставки із свідком захисту, право конфронтації ( право обвинуваченого на очну ставку із свідком захисту)
right to be represented by counsel — право бути представленим адвокатом, право на представництво через адвоката
right to choose among a variety of products in a marketplace free from control by one or a few sellers — право вибирати продукцію на ринку, вільному від контролю одного чи кількох продавців
right to choose between speech and silence — право самому визначати, чи говорити, чи мовчати
right to compensation for the loss of earnings resulting from an injury at work — право на відшкодування за втрату заробітку ( або працездатності) внаслідок каліцтва на роботі, право отримати компенсацію за втрату джерела прибутку внаслідок виробничої травми
right to conduct confidential communications — право здійснювати конфіденційне спілкування, право конфіденційного спілкування ( адвоката з клієнтом тощо)
right to diplomatic relations with other countries — право на дипломатичні відносини з іншими країнами
right to do with one's body as one pleases — право робити з своїм тілом все, що завгодно
right to enjoy the benefits of scientific progress — право на користування досягненнями наукового прогресу
right to freedom from torture and other inhuman forms of treatment — право на свободу від тортур і інших форм негуманного поводження
right to gather and publish information or opinions without governmental control or fear of punishment — право збирати і публікувати інформацію або думки без втручання держави і страху бути покараним
right to lease or sell the airspace above the property — право здавати в оренду або продавати повітряний простір над своєю власністю
right to leave any country, including one's own, and to return to one's country — право залишати будь-яку країну, включаючи свою власну, і повертатися до своєї країни
right to material security in (case of) disability — право на матеріальне забезпечення у випадку втрати працездатності
right to material security in (case of) sickness — право на матеріальне забезпечення у випадку захворювання
right to possession, enjoyment and disposal — право на володіння, користування і розпорядження
right to safety from product-related hazards — право на безпеку від шкоди, яку може бути заподіяно товаром
right to terminate pregnancy through an abortion — право припиняти вагітність шляхом здійснення аборту
right to the protection of moral and material interests — право на захист моральних і матеріальних інтересів
right to use one's own language — право на свою власну мову; право спілкуватися своєю власною мовою
right to visit one's children regularly — право відвідувати регулярно дітей ( про одного з розлученого подружжя)
right of a person to control the distribution of information about himself — = right of a person to control the distribution of information about herself право особи контролювати поширення інформації про себе
right of a person to control the distribution of information about herself — = right of a person to control the distribution of information about himself
right of states to self-defence — = right of states to self-defense право держав на самооборону
right of states to self-defense — = right of states to self-defence
right of the accused to counsel — = right of the accused to legal advice право обвинуваченого на адвоката (захисника) ( або на захист)
right of the accused to legal advice — = right of the accused to counsel
right to collective self-defence — = right to collective self-defense право на колективну самооборону
right to collective self-defense — = right to collective self-defence
right to collective self-defence — = right to collective self-defense право на колективну самооборону
right to collective self-defense — = right to collective self-defence
right to consult with one's attorney — = right to consult with one's lawyer право отримувати юридичну допомогу від (свого) адвоката, право на консультацію з адвокатом
right to consult with one's lawyer — = right to consult with one's attorney
right to control the work of the administration — = right to control the work of the managerial staff право контролю (діяльності) адміністрації ( підприємства)
right to control the work of the managerial staff — = right to control the work of the administration
right to individual self-defence — = right to individual self-defense право на індивідуальну самооборону
right to individual self-defense — = right to individual self-defence
right to obtain documents essential for an adequate defence — = right to obtain documents essential for an adequate defense право отримувати документи, необхідні для належного захисту
right to obtain documents essential for an adequate defense — = right to obtain documents essential for an adequate defence
right to regulate news agencies — = right to regulate news organizations право регулювати діяльність інформаційних агентств
- right a wrong doneright to regulate news organizations — = right to regulate news agencies
- right at law
- Right-Centrist
- right extremism
- right extremist
- right-hand man
- right-holder
- right in action
- right in gross
- right in personam
- right in rem
- right not to belong to a union
- right of a trial by jury
- right of abode
- right of access
- right of access to courts
- right of access to court
- right of action
- right of angary
- right of appeal
- right of approach
- right of appropriation
- right of assembly
- right of asylum
- right of audience
- right of authorship
- right of birth
- right of blood
- right of chapel
- right of choice
- right of common
- right of concurrent user
- right of conscience
- right of contribution
- right of correction
- right of court
- right of denunciation
- right of detention
- right of dissent
- right of divorce
- right of eminent domain
- right of enjoyment
- right of entry
- right of equal protection
- right of establishment
- right of existence
- right of expatriation
- right of expectancy
- right of feud
- right of first refusal
- right of fishery
- right of free access
- right of hot pursuit
- right of individual petition
- right of innocent passage
- right of intercourse
- right of intervention
- right of joint use
- right of jurisdiction
- right of legal entity
- right of legation
- right of light
- right of membership
- right of military service
- right of mortgage
- right of navigation
- right of operative management
- right of ownership
- right of passage
- right of patent
- right of personal security
- right of petition
- right of place
- right of political asylum
- right of possession
- right of pre-emption
- right of primogeniture
- right of prior use
- right of priority
- right of privacy
- right of private property
- right of property
- right of protest
- right of publicity
- right of pursuit
- right of re-election
- right of recourse
- right of recovery
- right of redemption
- right of regress
- right of relief
- right of remuneration
- right of reply
- right of representation
- right of reprisal
- right of reproduction
- right of rescission
- right of retaliation
- right of retention
- right of sanctuary
- right of search
- right of secrecy
- right of self-determination
- right of self-preservation
- right of settlement
- right of silence
- right of suit
- right of taking game
- right of the individual
- right of the owner
- right of the people
- right of the state
- right of transit
- right of translation
- right of visit
- right of visit and search
- right of water
- right of way
- right of withdrawal
- right on name
- right oneself
- right the oppressed
- right to a building
- right to a counsel
- right to a dual citizenship
- right to a fair trial
- right to a flag
- right to a hearing
- right to a nationality
- right to a piece of land
- right to a reasonable bail
- right to a speedy trial
- right to a trial by jury
- right to act independently
- right to administer property
- right to adopt children
- right to aid of counsel
- right to air
- right to an abortion
- right to an effective remedy
- right to annul laws
- right to appeal
- right to appoint judges
- right to assemble peaceably
- right to assistance of counsel
- right to attend
- right to bail
- right to bargain collectively
- right to be confronted
- right to be heard
- right to be presumed innocent
- right to be represented
- right to bear arms
- right to bear fire-arms
- right to become president
- right to begin
- right to belong to a union
- right to burn national flag
- right to carry a firearm
- right to carry arms
- right to carry fire-arms
- right to challenge a candidate
- right to challenge a juror
- right to change allegiance
- right to choose
- right to choose one's religion
- right to coin money
- right to collective bargaining
- right to compensation
- right to consult an attorney
- right to counsel
- right to criticism
- right to cultural autonomy
- right to damages
- right to declare war
- right to designate one's hairs
- right to die
- right to divorce
- right to earn a living
- right to education
- right to elect and be elected
- right to emigrate
- right to end pregnancy
- right to enjoy one's benefits
- right to enter a country
- right to exact payment
- right to expel a trespasser
- right to express ones' views
- right to expropriate
- right to fish
- right to fly a maritime flag
- right to found a family
- right to frame a constitution
- right to free education
- right to free medical services
- right to freedom
- right to freedom from torture
- right to freedom of expression
- right to freedom of residence
- right to freedom of speech
- right to health
- right to hold a public office
- right to hold property
- right to housing
- right to human dignity
- right to immediate release
- right to impose taxes
- right to impose taxes
- right to independence
- right to inherit
- right to initiate legislation
- right to inspection
- right to interpret laws
- right to intervene
- right to introduce legislation
- right to join an association
- right to jury trial
- right to keep and bear arms
- right to keep arms
- right to possess firearms
- right to kill
- right to land
- right to lease
- right to legal equality
- right to legal representation
- right to legislate
- right to levy taxes
- right to liberty
- right to life
- right to make a decision
- right to make a will
- right to make treaties
- right to manage
- right to maternity leave
- right to medical care
- right to national autonomy
- right to neutrality
- right to nullify laws
- right to one's own culture
- right to oppose
- right to organize unions
- right to ownership of property
- right to personal security
- right to picket
- right to possess firearms
- right to practice law
- right to present witnesses
- right to privacy
- right to private property
- right to property
- right to protection
- right to public trial
- right to publish expression
- right to punish a child
- right to real estate
- right to recall
- right to recover
- right to redeem
- right to redress
- right to regulate trade
- right to remain silent
- right to remarry
- right to rest
- right to rest and leisure
- right to retain counsel
- right to return to work
- right to safety
- right to secede
- right to secede from the USSR
- right to secession
- right to security
- right to security of person
- right to seek elective office
- right to seek pardon
- right to seek refund
- right to self-determination
- right to self-expression
- right to self-government
- right to sell
- right to silence
- right to social insurance
- right to social security
- right to speak
- right to stop a prosecution
- right to strike
- right to sublet
- right to subpoena witness
- right to sue
- right to take water
- right to tariff reduction
- right to tax exemption
- right to terminate a contract
- right to terminate pregnancy
- right to the name
- right to the office
- right to the patent
- right to the voice
- right to think freely
- right to transfer property
- right to travel
- right to treasure trove
- right to trial by jury
- right to use
- right to use firearms
- right to use force
- right to use water
- right to veto
- right to will property
- right to work
- right of defence
- right of defense
- right to collect revenues
- right to collect taxes
- right to exist
- right to existence
- right to issue decrees
- right to issue edicts
- right to labor
- right to labour
- right to self-defence
- right to self-defense
- right to set penalties
- right to set punishment -
17 उद्वेग _udvēga
1उद्वेग a. [उद्गतो वेगो$स्मात्]1 Going swiftly (as an express messenger), courier.-2 Steady, calm, tranquil.-3 Ascending, mounting.-4 One whose arms by long practice continue always raised above the head (as an ascetic).-गः 1 Trembling, shaking, waving.-2 Agita- tion, excitement; हर्षामर्षभयोद्वेगैर्मुक्तो यः स च मे प्रियः Bg. 12.15.-3 Alarm, fear; शान्तोद्वेगस्तिमितनयनं दृष्टभक्तिर्भवान्या Me.38; सहसोद्वेगमियं व्रजेदिति R.8.7.-4 Anxiety, regret, sorrow, distress (caused by separation from one's favourite object). निवसन्त्यत्र राजेन्द्र गतोद्वेगा निरुत्सुकाः Mb.3.173.14.-5 Admiration, astonishment.-गम् A betelnut (fruit.).-Comp. -कर, -कारक, -कारिन् a. Causing anxiety, agitation or distress; Pt.2उद्वेग See under उद्विज्. -
18 तङ्कः _taṅkḥ
तङ्कः [तङ्क् भावे अच्]1 Living in distress, a miser- able life.-2 Grief produced by separation from a beloved object.-3 Fear, terror.-4 A stone-cutter's chisel.-5 A garment. -
19 विधुर _vidhura
1विधुर a. [विगता धूर्यस्य अच् समा˚ Uṇ.1.39]1 Dis- tressed, troubled, afflicted, overwhelmed with grief, miserable; अवस्थामापन्ना मदनदहनोद्दाहविधुराम् Māl.2.3; 9.11; U.3.38;<?>6.41; Ki.11.26; Śi.9.77;17.66; Bh.3.8,134; नेत्राग्निप्लोषमूर्च्छाविधुरविनिपतत्सानलद्वादशार्कः Nāg.5.31.-2 Love-lorn, bereaved, suffering separa- tion from a wife or husband; मयि च विधुरे भावः कान्ताप्रवृत्तिपराङ्मुखः V.4.2; विधुरां ज्वलनातिसर्जनान्ननु मां प्रापय पत्युरन्तिकम् Ku.4.32; विधुरबन्धुरबन्धुरमैक्षत Śi.6. 29;12.8; निर्व्याजं विधुरेष्वधीर इति मां येनाभिधत्ते भवान् Nāg.2.3.-3 Devoid, deprived, or destitute of, free from; त्वामाद्यन्तान्तरवर्ति त्रयविधुरः Bhāg.6.16.36; सा वै कलङ्कविधुरा मधुराननश्रीः Bv.2.5.-4 Adverse, hostile, unfriendly; कूपान्तः पतितः करोतु विधुरे किं वा विधौ पौरुषम् Pt.2.85.-5 Unable, helpless; प्रतिक्रियायै विधुरः Ki.17. 41.-6 Incapable to perform अनुष्ठानशून्य); अनुत्पन्नं ज्ञानं यदि यदि च संदेहविधुरम् Mv.3.36.-7 Infirm, drooping (विगलित); हयेश्च विधुरग्रीवै रथैश्च शकलीकृतैः Mb.7.146.25.-रः A widower.-रम् 1 Alarm, fear, anxiety.-2 Separation from a wife or husband, bereavement suf- fered by a lover or mistress.-3 Calamity, distress; विधुरं किमतः परम् Ki.2.7.-Comp. -दर्शनम् 1 the sight of danger or alarm; विना विधुरदर्शनं स्वामिनो मन्दादरा भवन्ति H.2.-2 a feeling of agitation.2विधुर a. Destitute of a shaft (as a carriage). -
20 उद्वेग
ud-vegamfn. going swiftly;
an express messenger, a runner, courier, etc. L. ;
steady, composed, tranquil L. ;
ascending mounting, going up orᅠ upwards L. ;
an ascetic whose arms by long habit continue always raised above the head L. ;
m. trembling, waving, shaking;
agitation, anxiety;
regret, fear, distress (occasioned by separation from a beloved object) MBh. Ragh. Pañcat. etc.;
the being offended Kāvyâd. ;
admiration, astonishment L. ;
( udvegaṉkṛi, to disturb;
to be disturbed in mind R. Sāh. Pañcat. etc.);
(am) n. the fruit of the Areca Faufel;
the Areca nut (called betel nut because eaten with the betel leaf) L. ;
ud-vejaka, etc. seeᅠ cols. 1 and 2.
- 1
- 2
См. также в других словарях:
Separation anxiety disorder — Separation anxiety is a psychological condition in which an individual has excessive anxiety regarding separation from home or from people to whom the individual has a strong emotional attachment (like a father and mother). Background Present in… … Wikipedia
Fear Factory — en concert Pays d’origine … Wikipédia en Français
separation anxiety — n a form of anxiety that is caused by separation from a significant nurturant figure and typically a parent or from familiar surroundings and that has an onset during childhood or sometimes adolescence * * * a state of distress and fear at the… … Medical dictionary
separation anxiety — fear of abandonment, person s fear of being neglected by someone close to him which causes this person to act very dependently and to be depressed … English contemporary dictionary
Fear Effect Inferno — Infobox VG title = Fear Effect Inferno developer = Kronos Digital Entertainment publisher = Eidos Interactive designer = Stan Liu released = Cancelled genre = Action adventure modes = Single player ratings = vgratings|ESRB=Mature platforms =… … Wikipedia
separation — noun 1 being apart ADJECTIVE ▪ complete, total ▪ clear, rigid, strict ▪ long ▪ She is visiting her family after a long separation … Collocations dictionary
Fear of the dark — For other uses, see Fear of the dark (disambiguation). The fear of the dark is a common fear among children and to a varying degree is observed for adults. Fear of the dark is usually not fear of the darkness itself, but fear of possible or… … Wikipedia
separation anxiety — 1. the normal fear and apprehension expressed by infants when removed from their mothers or approached by strangers. 2. any similar reaction in later life caused by separation from familiar surroundings or close friends or family. * * * noun… … Useful english dictionary
separation anxiety — 1. the normal fear and apprehension expressed by infants when removed from their mothers or approached by strangers. 2. any similar reaction in later life caused by separation from familiar surroundings or close friends or family. * * * … Universalium
separation anxiety — a state of distress and fear at the prospect of leaving secure surroundings, such as is experienced by some children when they must leave parents to go to school. It is often caused by insecure attachment … The new mediacal dictionary
Command-query separation — (CQS) is a principle of imperative computer programming. It was devised by Bertrand Meyer as part of his pioneering work on the Eiffel programming language. It states that every method should either be a command that performs an action, or a… … Wikipedia